manual of laparoscopic urology

225

Upload: scu-hospital

Post on 19-Aug-2015

249 views

Category:

Health & Medicine


4 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Manual of laparoscopic urology
Page 2: Manual of laparoscopic urology

Manual of laparoscopic urology

Page 3: Manual of laparoscopic urology

Foreword by Claude Schulman

Manual of laparoscopic urology

Alberto Rosenblatt Renaud Bollens Baldo Espinoza Cohen

With 334 Figures

123

Page 4: Manual of laparoscopic urology

alberto rosenblattAlbert Einstein Jewish Hospital (HIAE)Av. Albert Einstein, 627/701São Paulo 05651-901 Brazil [email protected]

renaud BollensErasme HospitalUniversity Clinics of BrusselsRoute de Lennik 808 B1070 [email protected]

Baldo Espinoza cohenHospital Clinico Regional de AntofagastaHospital Militar del NorteGeneral Borgoño [email protected]

ISBN 978-3-540-74726-0e-ISBN 978-3-540-74727-7

Library of Congress Control Number: 2007935176

© 2008 Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg

This work is subject to copyright. All rights are reserved, whether the whole or part of the material is concerned, specifically the rights of translation, reprinting, reuse of illustrations, recitation, broad-cast-ing, reproduction on microfilm or any other way, and storage in data banks. Duplication of this publication or parts thereof is permitted only under the provisions of the German Copyright Law of Septem-ber 9, 1965, in its current version, and permission for use must al-ways be obtained from Springer. Violations are liable to prosecution under the German Copyright Law.

The use of general descriptive names, registed names, trademarks etc. in this publication does not imply, even in the absence of a spe-cific statement, that such names are exempt from the relevant pro-tective laws and regulations and therefore free for general use.

Product liability: the publishers cannot guarantee the accuracy of any information about dosage and application contained in this book. In every individual case the user must check such information by consulting the relevant literature.

Cover design: Frido Steinen-Broo, EStudio Calamar, Spain

Printed on acid-free paper9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

springer.com

Page 5: Manual of laparoscopic urology

Effort only fully releases its reward after a person refuses to quit.

Napoleon Hill

Page 6: Manual of laparoscopic urology

foreword

This manual was conceived in a very practical way and highlights the step-by-step approach used in each procedure. The text also calls attention to the “little de-tails” that make all the difference when it comes to put-ting the steps into practice.

Of course, every expert in laparoscopy or open sur-gery has his own technique and his particular variety of practical advice. The techniques that are illustrated in this book are the standard ones used by Dr. Renaud Bollens at Erasme Hospital and by the different mem-bers of the department’s team under his expertise.

Essentially, this comprehensive Manual of Laparo-scopic Urology is an expansion of personal notes that should be extremely helpful to all of those interested in learning this challenging surgical technique.

December 2007 Professor Claude SchulmanBrussels, Belgium

Fellows from all over the world come to the Depart-ment of Urology at the University Clinics of Brussels at Erasme Hospital to learn or improve their skills in lapa-roscopy, a very rapidly expanding new surgical approach for most urological procedures traditionally performed by open surgery.

The urologists, whether experienced or in training, come to familiarise themselves with the different lapa-roscopic procedures, but it can take quite a long time to see all of the various procedures, and it can be especially difficult to learn the numerous tips and tricks that are used by expert laparoscopists.

The idea of writing a manual of laparoscopic urology grew progressively during the fellowship of Dr. Alberto Rosenblatt and Dr. Baldo Espinoza in our department in 2006. Their main objective was to compile valuable and difficult to find information and offer this instruc-tive and well-illustrated material to the urologic com-munity.

Page 7: Manual of laparoscopic urology

preface

Although the focus of this manual is on urological pro-cedures, plenty of valuable technical information that can be applied to any laparoscopic specialty has been included.

Like a mentor, this manual will guide the laparo-scopic surgeon through every aspect of the laparo-scopic procedure, from the equipment’s settings to the correct positioning of the needle on the needle holder. Every urologic procedure is described in a step-by-step sequence of events, and the text is supplemented with innumerous tips, colored illustrations, and high-defini-tion pictures depicting the main steps.

By following this well-illustrated sequence of surgical steps, readers can be confident in their ability to master the laparoscopic technique.

August 2007 Alberto Rosenblatt, M.D.São Paulo, Brazil

The excitement of moving into the field of laparoscopic surgery can be quickly overshadowed by the realization of how long it takes to acquire the skills needed to mas-ter the technique. Indeed, laparoscopic surgery requires a very good knowledge of anatomy as well as fairly good manual dexterity. Skills can be developed by practicing basic laparoscopic sutures in the “black box” or by train-ing in a virtual environment, but it is only by performing real laparoscopic operations that a surgeon can become truly competent.

However, learning time can be reduced by gaining an understanding of the small details and “tricks of the trade” that laparoscopic experts utilize and that increas-ingly facilitate the laparoscopic procedure.

The aim of this manual of urologic laparoscopy is to provide urologists and surgeons who are willing to master the techniques with a time-tested and reliable source of practical information on laparoscopic surgery.

Page 8: Manual of laparoscopic urology

contents

Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Chapter 4Laparoscopic Assisted Transperitoneal Nephroureterectomy Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . . 50 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . 52 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Access for the Lower Ureteral Dissection . . . . . 56 Surgical Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Chapter 5Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical Prostatectomy Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . . 64 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . 65 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Surgical Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Chapter 6Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical Prostatectomy Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . . 92 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . 93 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Surgical Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

section i

General Laparoscopic Information

Chapter 1Fundamentals of Laparoscopic Surgery Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 General Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Technical Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 7

section ii

Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

Chapter 2Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical Nephrectomy Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . . . 22 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . . 24 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Surgical Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Chapter 3Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Partial Nephrectomy Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . . . 36 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . . 37 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Surgical Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Page 9: Manual of laparoscopic urology

Xii contents

Chapter 7Laparoscopic Transperitoneal Radical Cystectomy Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . . 116 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . 116 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Radical Cystectomy in the Male . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Radical Cystectomy in the Female . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Chapter 8Laparoscopic Pelvic Lymph Node Dissection Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . . 140 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . 140 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Surgical Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

section iii

Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

Chapter 9Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Pyeloplasty Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . . 154 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . 154 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Surgical Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Chapter 10Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Donor Nephrectomy Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . . 166 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . . 167 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Surgical Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Chapter 11Hand-Assisted Bilateral Laparoscopic Intraperitoneal Nephrectomy Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . . 180 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . 181 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Surgical Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Chapter 12Laparoscopic Promontory Fixation Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . . 188 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . 188 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Surgical Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Schematic mesh position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Chapter 13Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Prostatic Adenomectomy Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . . 204 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . 205 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Surgical Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Subject Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Page 10: Manual of laparoscopic urology

General Laparoscopic Information

Section I

Page 11: Manual of laparoscopic urology

�Introduction

The use of laparoscopic surgery has rapidly expanded since the laparoscope merged with the video camera in the mid-1980s. Since then, significant developments of laparoscopic equipment and instruments have been made. Along with the technology, surgical skills have also improved with the incorporation of advanced lapa-roscopic techniques, allowing surgeons to safely per-form a multitude of laparoscopic interventions. Apart from the state-of-the-art equipment and surgical ex-pertise, laparoscopic procedures are usually technically demanding, requiring well-trained operative teams and good coordination with an anesthesiologist well versed in laparoscopy. Putting everything to work in perfect combination can make the difference between a safe, efficient operation and a long, difficult procedure that will increase the risk of perioperative and postoperative complications.

�General�Considerations

�Physiologic�Effects�of�Pneumoperitoneum�

Carbon dioxide (CO2) is the gas commonly used for in-flating the abdomen. Once inside the abdominal space, it is rapidly absorbed across the peritoneal membrane into the circulatory system. In the blood, carbonic acid is produced leading to respiratory acidosis, but this con-dition is attenuated due to the absorption of the CO2 by body buffers. However, during long laparoscopic pro-cedures, body buffers become saturated and hypercap-nia or respiratory acidosis develops. At this point, the lungs become responsible for the absorption and release of CO2 from the body buffers. Although this condition

Fundamentals of Laparoscopic Surgery

Chapter 1

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 General Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

�Physiologic�Effects�of�Pneumoperitoneum� . . 3�Pneumoperitoneum�and�Potential�Clinical�Outcomes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4�General�Advantages�of�Laparoscopy . . . . . . . . . 4�Laparoscopic�Contraindications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Special Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6�Anesthesia�Problems�in�Laparoscopic�Surgery 6

Technical Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7�Preinsufflation�Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7�Insufflator�Checklist� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8�Insufflator�Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8�Electrosurgical�Unit�Settings� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9�Instruments�for�Laparoscopic�Surgery . . . . . . . 9�Veress�Needle�Introduction�(Closed�Access) 11�Technique�of�Laparoscopic�Trocar�Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13�Laparoscopic�Suturing�Techniques . . . . . . . . . . 15

Page 12: Manual of laparoscopic urology

� Section I General Laparoscopic Information

can be corrected by the anesthesiologist, the associated effects of pneumoperitoneum pressure on the different organ systems can potentiate significant clinical distur-bances (see Pneumoperitoneum and Potential Clinical Outcomes). The pressure effects of pneumoperitoneum:

Increases intra-abdominal pressureDecreases cardiac output and stroke volumeDecreases femoral venous blood flow and venous re-turnReduces renal perfusion and intraoperative urine output Decreases respiratory compliance and increases air-way pressureIncreases intracranial pressure

�Pneumoperitoneum�and�Potential�Clinical�Outcomes

�Pulmonary�System

High peak airway pressures leading to an increased risk of barotrauma and/or pneumothorax Superior displacement of the diaphragm leading to an increase in Pco2 and/or a decrease in Po2 levels Decreased pulmonary compliance and vital capacity leading to an increase in Pco2 and/or a decrease in Po2 levels

�Circulatory�System

Increased central venous pressure, systemic vascular resistance, capillary wedge pressure, and mean arte-rial pressure leading to an increase in cardiac work Indirect effects on the sympathetic system, renin–an-giotensin system, and vasopressin leading to an in-crease in blood pressure and cardiac output Indirect effects of hypercapnia, such as arteriolar dilation and myocardial depression leading to a de-crease in blood pressure Vasovagal response caused by a rapid stretch of the peritoneum leading to bradycardia and occasionally a decrease in blood pressure

•••

Coagulation disturbances, such as lower extrem-ity venous stasis leading to deep venous thrombosis (DVT) and pulmonary embolism (PE)

�Renal�System

Reduced renal blood flow and glomerular filtration rate leading to a diminished urine output (direct pressure on kidney and renal vein) Increased release of renin with sodium retention Release of antidiuretic hormone (ADH), increasing water reabsorption in the distal tubules

�Gastrointestinal�System

Decreased sympathetic response leading to less ileus paralyticus

�Central�Nervous�System

Increased intracranial pressure leading to reduced central perfusion pressure

�Immunologic�System

Less pronounced immune suppression Fast return of cytokine levels to normal values

�General�Advantages�of�Laparoscopy

Small incision Minimal pain Attenuated stress response Earlier return to ambulation Reduced hospital stay Fast recovery

••

••

••••••

Page 13: Manual of laparoscopic urology

�Fundamentals of Laparoscopic SurgeryChapter 1

�Laparoscopic�Contraindications

�Intraperitoneal�Access

�Absolute�Contraindications

Acute peritonitis Severe chronic pulmonary obstructive disease Congestive heart failure Abdominal wall infections Bleeding diatheses Intestinal obstruction Malignant ascitesAcute glaucoma Increased cranial pressure Ventriculoperitoneal and peritoneojugular shunts (in-creased CO2 absorption and acidosis)

�Relative�Contraindications�

Severe chronic pulmonary obstructive disease Extensive prior abdominal surgery Aneurysms of the aorta or iliac arteries Intestinal obstruction Pelvic fibrosis (previous radiation therapy and previ-ous hip replacement surgery due to sealant leakage) Organomegaly Severe diaphragmatic hernia (risk of CO2 leakage into the mediastinum) Pregnancy

�Extraperitoneal�Access

�Relative�Contraindications�

Prior lower abdominal surgery Prior pelvic surgery Prior inguinal hernia surgical repair

••••••••••

•••••

••

•••

�General�Complications��of�Laparoscopy

�Injury�to�Adjacent�Organs

Bowel puncture (see Veress Needle Introduction) Bowel wall thermal injury Bleeding from solid organs (liver and spleen) Bladder perforation Uterus puncture

�Vascular�Injuries

Abdominal wall vessels

T I P

An injury to the abdominal wall vessels is usu-ally visible as blood dripping from one of the tro-cars and/or blood seen on the surface of abdomi-nal structures. The usual cause of the bleeding is an iatrogenic injury to the inferior epigastric ar-tery or one of its branches. The bleeding can be controlled with the application of direct pressure using the involved trocar, coagulation of the ves-sel with the bipolar grasper, or a laparoscopic-guided or open suture ligation tied over a gauze bolster to tamponade the bleeding site.

Intra-abdominal large and small vessels

T I P

The right common iliac artery lies directly below the umbilicus. (see Veress Needle Introduction)

�Access�Complications�

Port site hernia Wound infection

•••••

••

Page 14: Manual of laparoscopic urology

� Section I General Laparoscopic Information

Port site seeding of tumor cells

�Pneumoperitoneum�Complications�

Pneumothorax Pneumomediastinum Subcutaneous emphysema Gas embolus

�Special�Considerations

�Anesthesia�Problems��in�Laparoscopic�Surgery

�Trendelenburg�Position�

Increases intracranial and intraocular pressures, which may lead to cerebral edema, retinal detach-ment, and even blindness (especially the long-lasting extreme head-down position for pelvic and lower ab-dominal procedures) Increases intrathoracic pressure, central venous pres-sure, capillary wedge pressure, and mean arterial pressure leading to an increase in cardiac work Increases venous return, which in combination with pneumoperitoneum may lead to congestive heart failure and even acute myocardial infarction

�Hypercapnia

When hypercapnia occurs: Reduce the intra-abdominal pressure or stop the pro-cedure until Pco2 decreases Decrease the angle of the Trendelenburg position Increase the minute volume of ventilation

••••

••

T I P

To avoid the risk of subcutaneous emphysema and hypercapnia, never suture the skin around the trocar when fixing it.

�CO2�Embolism

Usually occurs due to misplacement of the Veress nee-dle:

Into a vessel Into a parenchymal organ (mainly the liver)Hypovolemia is a risk factor

�Signs�of�CO2�Embolism

Profound hypotension Cyanosis Arrhythmias Asystole Immediate increase of end-tidal CO2 accompanied by a sudden decline in oxygen saturation and then a marked decrease in end-tidal CO2 due to cardiovas-cular collapse

When a CO2 embolism is suspected, the following meas-ures must be taken immediately:

Stop insufflation and deflate the pneumoperitoneum Place the patient in a left lateral head-down position (this will enable the gas embolus to move into the right ventricular apex, preventing its entry into the pulmonary artery) Increase minute ventilation and 100% in-tidal O2 ad-ministration Introduce a central venous catheter to enable aspira-tion of the gas Administer cardiopulmonary resuscitation in case of asystole Administer hyperbaric oxygen therapy, if available

•••

•••••

••

Page 15: Manual of laparoscopic urology

�Fundamentals of Laparoscopic SurgeryChapter 1

T I P

Most cases of suspected gas embolism will resolve with the first two measures above.

�Recovery�Period�

Extended postoperative mechanical ventilation may sometimes be needed until all extra CO2 has been elimi-nated:

Following prolonged laparoscopic procedures When high intra-abdominal insufflation pressure is applied When extensive subcutaneous emphysema is present

Urine output must be carefully controlled: Following prolonged laparoscopic procedures When high intra-abdominal insufflation pressure is applied

�Postoperative�Nausea�and�Vomiting�

�Etiology

Mechanical pressure to gut and stomach Stretching of vagal nerve endings in the peritoneum Vasodilatation of the cerebral vessels by CO2, conse-quently raising the intracranial pressure

�Prophylaxis

Antiemetics Ondansetron, 4 mg administered intravenously just before the end of surgery Dexamethasone in combination with Ondansetron to extend the duration of antiemesis

�Pain�Management

Evacuation of residual gas before trocar removal Opioid analgesia Local anesthetic infiltration of port sites

••

••

•••

••

•••

Preemptive analgesia

�Technical�Considerations

�Preinsufflation�Checklist

CO2 tank is full or an extra tank is available Gas valve on the cylinder is open Laparoscopic tower is switched on and equipment is operational Insufflator is operational and settings are correct (see Insufflator Checklist) In-line filter is connected between insufflator and in-sufflation tubing Electrosurgical unit is operational and settings are correct Instruments are compatible with electrocautery and adequately insulated Bipolar and monopolar scissor pedals are connected and operational Laparoscope image is white balanced Suction device is operational (suction and irrigation tubing are connected and working) Veress needle tip retracts properly

•••

••

F I G . � 1

Insufflator�settings

Page 16: Manual of laparoscopic urology

� Section I General Laparoscopic Information

An extra pair of scissors is available

�Insufflator�Checklist�

Maximum pressure on the insufflator is set to 12 mmHg Pressure is set according to the following:

Initiate with high pressure when performing an extraperitoneal laparoscopic radical prostatec-tomy or when using the open access technique Initiate with low pressure when using the Veress needle (closed access) technique

CO2 flow rate is set to 35 L/min (Fig. 1) Safety valve pressure is set to 35 mmHg

�Insufflator�Tips

Intra-abdominal pressure for safe trocar introduction should be equal to or higher than 10 mmHg.

T I P

Pressure is the most important parameter.

Intra-abdominal volume for safe trocar introduction should be equal to or higher than 2.5 L.

•–

••

F I G . � 2

Electrosurgical�unit

F I G . � 3

Instruments�for�laparoscopic�surgery

F I G . � 4

Bipolar�grasper

F I G . � 5

Ethicon™�clip�applier�(10�mm)�and�clips�

Page 17: Manual of laparoscopic urology

�Fundamentals of Laparoscopic SurgeryChapter 1

T I P

Misconnecting the insufflation line to the Ver-ess needle can cause the gas to leak, resulting in false readings.

�Electrosurgical�Unit�Settings�

Monopolar Coagulation set to 50 Watts (Fig. 2) Cutting set to 0 Bipolar Coagulation set to 50 Watts Auto stop set to Off

�Instruments�for�Laparoscopic�Surgery

�Basic�Instruments�(see�Fig.�3)

Needle holder Bipolar grasper (Fig. 4) Monopolar scissors

••••

•••

F I G . � 6

a�LigaSure™�5�mm�(Tyco�Healthcare).�b�LigaSure�at�bladder�pedicle

F I G . � 7

a� Multifire� Endo� GIA™� 30� 12-mm� stapler.� b� Endo� GIA� sta-pling�renal�vein

Page 18: Manual of laparoscopic urology

10 Section I General Laparoscopic Information

Graspers

�Other�Instruments�for�Vessel�and�Tissue�Ligation

Clip applier forceps (non-disposable) (Fig. 5) Laparoscopic sealer/divider instrument

T I P

The LigaSure™ 5 mm (Tyco Healthcare) has a small tip suitable for tissue dissection, and the sealing and dividing function is hand-controlled. (Fig. 6a,b)

Endo GIA™ 30 12-mm stapler (Autosuture) (Fig. 7a,b)

Specimen�Retrieval�Device

Endobag (Fig. 8a,b)

••

F I G . � 8�

a�Endo�Catch�II�15�mm�(Autosuture).�b�Renal�vein�(A);�V.�cava�(B);�Right�renal�artery�(C);�Kidney�inside�Endobag�(D)

F I G . � 9

a� Laparoscopic� instruments/trocars� for� radical� prostatec-tomy.� b� Laparoscopic� instruments/trocars� for� promontory�fixation

Page 19: Manual of laparoscopic urology

11Fundamentals of Laparoscopic SurgeryChapter 1

�Laparoscopic�Instruments�Table�(see�Fig.�9a,b)

�Veress�Needle�Introduction��(Closed�Access)

The Veress needle can be disposable or reusable (Fig. 10).The blunt tip of the needle retracts when it is pressed against a tough structure, exposing its sharp edge. Af-ter the needle passes through the abdominal wall lay-ers, the blunt tip is deployed, preventing damage to the abdominal structures. The CO2 gas for the abdominal insufflation passes through the hollow cannula of the Veress needle.

T I P

The maximum flow through the needle is 0.2 L/min due to its internal diameter.

While introducing the needle, it is important to feel it passing through the layers of the abdominal wall. The initial thrust is at the level of the external oblique/rectus fascia, followed by the transversalis fascia and perito-neum.

T I P

As the needle enters the peritoneal cavity, a click sound can often be heard, meaning the blunt tip has sprung forward.

It is preferable to avoid introduction of the Veress needle in the vicinity of a previous abdominal scar.

T I P

When bowel adhesions are suspected, the Ver-ess needle is not used, and the fascia is opened under direct vision (i.e., open access); the perito-neum should be digitally entered and the adhe-sions carefully released with gentle digital move-ments.

�Introduction�Technique��for�Pelvic�Laparoscopic�Procedures

A subumbilical incision is made 50% larger than the di-ameter of the trocar that will be inserted. The abdominal

F I G . � 1 0

Disposable�Veress�needle

F I G . � 1 1

Veress�needle�introduction

Page 20: Manual of laparoscopic urology

12 Section I General Laparoscopic Information

wall is elevated by manually grasping the skin and sub-cutaneous tissue (Fig. 11).The Veress needle is grasped by the shaft like a dart and then passed into the incision perpendicularly to the ab-dominal wall. Following introduction, two tests are per-formed in sequence to confirm that the needle is inside the peritoneal cavity (Fig. 12).

1. Initially, a 20-mL syringe is connected to the needle, and the plunger is drawn out to test for the presence of air or blood. If blood is aspirated, a vessel was punctured and conversion to open surgery should be done without removal of the Veress needle. In the case that gas and/or a yellow or cloudy fluid are as-pirated, the needle is placed inside the lumen of the bowel. The needle is then removed and replaced in the correct position. The optic is reintroduced, and the puncture of the bowel must be found and lapa-roscopically repaired. In this particular situation, a prosthesis should not be placed due to the risk of bacterial contamination.

2. Then, the syringe is filled with 20 mL of air. It is re-connected to the Veress needle, the air is injected, and the plunger is drawn out to test for the presence of air. No air should return to the syringe (if air returns, the needle is placed in a closed location and most prob-ably in the preperitoneal space). The insufflation tub-ing is connected to the Veress needle, the stopcock is opened, and the abdomen is insufflated. Initiating with a low flow is recommended to avoid damage to a vital structure in case the needle is mispositioned. Switch to high flow if the intra-abdominal pressure is low and the insufflation pressure is increasing at a steady and normal level along with a tympanic per-cussion of the liver area. Then, the needle is removed and the primary trocar is introduced perpendicularly to the abdominal wall.

F I G . � 1 3

a�Subcostal�incision.�b�Needle�introduction�through�the�incision

F I G . � 1 2

Syringe�is�connected�to�Veress�needle

Page 21: Manual of laparoscopic urology

13Fundamentals of Laparoscopic SurgeryChapter 1

�Introduction�Technique��for�Upper�Tract�Laparoscopic�Procedures�

A cutaneous incision is made 50% larger than the diam-eter of the trocar that will be inserted. This is done two fingerbreadths below the costal margin arch, at the level of the lateral border of the rectus muscle. The abdomi-nal wall is elevated by manually grasping the skin and subcutaneous tissue, and the Veress needle is introduced through the incision (Fig. 13a,b).

The Veress needle must be introduced perpendicu-larly to the plane of the patient

T I P

For the right side, the needle can be introduced at an angle of 30° caudally to the abdominal wall to avoid liver puncture.

After introduction, the procedures to confirm the cor-rect placement of the needle are the same as for the pel-vic laparoscopic surgery.

�Technique��of�Laparoscopic�Trocar�Introduction

�Types�of�Trocars�

Trocars can be disposable or reusable and are available in different sizes (2 mm, 5 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, and 15 mm). The obturator tip may be bladed or blunt, and the blunt tip may be associated with a lower incidence of injury to intraperitoneal structures and vessels of the abdominal wall (Fig. 14).

T I P

Always check for a sharp tip on reusable trocars; unsharpened tips will result in a forceful thrust, increasing the risk of vessel or organ injury dur-ing laparoscopic access.

At the end of the laparoscopic procedure, the aponeu-rosis of trocar sites 10 mm or larger should be closed to avoid the occurrence of incisional hernias. The risk of hernias may be reduced by the utilization of the blunt tip trocar.

�Trocar�Positioning�

The primary camera port preferably should be in line with the structure of interest (for example, the renal hi-lum during a laparoscopic nephrectomy), and at a 45° angle to the area of interest. The working ports (right and left hand) should be on either side of the camera port and at an adequate distance from each other and from the camera, preventing the crossing of the instru-ments. The smaller diameter trocar is usually positioned at the surgeon’s dominant hand side, and the larger trocar is for the nondominant one. This is to prevent instrument shaking while performing sensitive tasks, which are usually exerted by the dominant hand. The secondary trocar placement site is marked by pressing a finger on the abdominal wall, and the indentation is internally viewed with the optic, allowing the insertion of all secondary trocars under direct laparoscopic visu-alization.

F I G . � 1 4

Disposable�blunt�tip�and�reusable�trocars�

Page 22: Manual of laparoscopic urology

1� Section I General Laparoscopic Information

F I G . � 1 5

a�Trocar�introduction�(see�middle�finger�position).�b�Trocar�introduction

F I G . � 1 6

The�thread�is�straightened�out

F I G . � 1 7

Half�loop�open�with�both�needle�holders�in�close�proximity

Page 23: Manual of laparoscopic urology

1�Fundamentals of Laparoscopic SurgeryChapter 1

�Trocar�Introduction

Pneumoperitoneum should be adequate. The skin inci-sion is made 50% larger than the diameter of the trocar. The trocar is firmly grasped against the palm of the hand to arm the device; the middle finger is extended for fur-ther insertion control, and the trocar is introduced with a firm and constant screwing motion (Fig. 15a,b).

The trocar should be inserted perpendicularly to the abdominal wall, and the insertion angle can be changed as soon as the tip pierces the peritoneum.

Following trocar placement and obturator removal, the trocar valve is briefly opened to check for egress of gas, confirming it is correctly placed inside the abdomen. The insufflator line is then connected to the trocar.

�Laparoscopic�Suturing�Techniques

�Basic�Suturing

The left needle holder grasps the thread. The thread is straightened out by pulling with the right needle holder.

••

The axis of the thread is kept perpendicular to the left needle holder to facilitate loop construction (Fig. 16). A half loop is made. The left needle holder stays in close proximity to the right one to keep the loop opened (Fig. 17). The left needle holder advances forward, and the right needle holder moves out of the half loop (Fig. 18a,b).

••

F I G . � 1 8

a�Left�needle�holder�advances.�b�Right�needle�holder�moves�out�of�the�loop

F I G . � 1 9

Left�needle�holder�grabs�the�open�loop

Page 24: Manual of laparoscopic urology

1� Section I General Laparoscopic Information

T I P

Do not pull with the right needle holder before the second knot is tied to avoid loosening the knot.

F I G . � 2 0

The�knot�is�closed

The knot is completed by advancing the right needle holder forward, and the left needle holder pulls in to-ward the trocar.

T I P

To avoid intra-abdominal injures, never pull the thread by the needle.

�Advanced�Suturing

When the first knot loosens, the left needle holder grabs the open loop, and the right needle holder grabs the distal thread (Fig. 19). The left needle holder gently pulls the loop to close the knot (Fig. 20). The left needle holder swiftly grabs the proximal thread while the right needle holder keeps the distal thread tensioned (Fig. 21). Both thread ends are pulled out to tie the knot (Fig. 22).

F I G . � 2 1

Left�needle�holder�swiftly�grabs�proximal�thread

F I G . � 2 2

Threads�are�pulled�out,�and�the�knot�is�tied

Page 25: Manual of laparoscopic urology

1�Fundamentals of Laparoscopic SurgeryChapter 1

�Suggested�Readings

Sriprasad S, Yu DF: Positional anatomy of vessels that may be damaged at laparoscopy: new access criteria based on CT and ultrasonography to avoid vascular injury. J Endou-rol 2006 Jul; 20(7):498–503.Hamade AM, Butt I: Closed blunt-trocar 5 mm-port for primary cannulation in laparoscopic surgery: a safe tech-nique. Surg Laparosc Endosc Percutan Tech 2006 Jun; 16(3):156–160.Jean JMCH de la Rosette, Inderbir SG: Laparoscopic Uro-logic Surgery in Malignancies. Springer, 2005.Saber AA, Meslemani AM: Safety zones for anterior ab-dominal wall entry during laparoscopy: a CT scan mapping of epigastric vessels. Ann Surg 2004 Feb; 239(2):182–185.Shalhav AL, Barret E: Transperitoneal laparoscopic renal surgery using blunt 12-mm trocar without fascial closure. J Endourol 2002 Feb; 16(1):43–46.Rist M, Hemmerling TM: Influence of pneumoperitoneum and patient positioning on preload and splanchnic blood

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

volume in laparoscopic surgery of the lower abdomen. J Clin Anesth 2001; 13:244–249.Philips PA, Amaral JF: Abdominal access complications in laparoscopic surgery. J Am Coll Surg 2001; 19:525–536.Odeberg-Wernerman S: Laparoscopic surgery – effects on circulatory and respiratory physiology: an overview. Eur J Surg Suppl 2000; 585:4–11.Kashtan J, Green JF: Hemodynamic effects of increased ab-dominal pressure. J Surg Res 1981; 30:249–255.Chapron CM, Pierre F: Major vascular injuries during gy-necologic laparoscopy. J Am Coll Surg 1997; 185:461–465.Riza ED, Deshmukh AS: An improved method of securing abdominal wall bleeders during laparoscopy. J Laparoen-dosc Surg 1995; 5:37–40.Vasquez JM: Vascular complications of laparoscopic sur-gery. J Am Assoc Gynecol Laparosc 1994; 1:163–167.Loris J: Anesthetic Management of Laparoscopy, 4th ed.. New York, Churchill Livingstone, 1994.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

Page 26: Manual of laparoscopic urology

Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

Section II

Page 27: Manual of laparoscopic urology

�Introduction

Laparoscopic radical nephrectomy (LRN) is the sur-gical treatment of choice for patients presenting with early stage (T1) renal cell carcinoma. The laparoscopic approach has many advantages compared with open radical nephrectomy, including decreased blood loss, less pain, faster postoperative recovery, and improved cosmetics. Furthermore, this minimally invasive ap-proach parallels the open technique in oncologic effi-cacy. The laparoscopic procedure has been increasingly used for higher stage tumors even though the use of the technique on large tumors has not yet been proved safe. Urologic surgeons with advanced laparoscopic skills are now able to manage highly selected patients with locally advanced disease and tumors with renal vein or vena cava thrombi. For selected kidney tumors less than 4 cm, current trends in organ preservation favor laparoscopic partial nephrectomy (see Chap. 3).

�Preoperative�Preparation

Before a patient consents to a laparoscopic nephrectomy, it is important to discuss the specific risks of the surgery, including the potential need to convert to the traditional open operation if difficulties arise.

The patient is admitted to the hospital the day before the surgery for bowel preparation, which includes 2 L of Colopeg® (1 envelope/L) p.o. and a Fleet® enema. Fasting starts at midnight before surgery. Thrombo-prophylaxis protocol is implemented with good hydra-tion, placement of compressive elastic stockings on the lower extremities, and low-molecular-weight heparin. Enoxaparin (Clexane®, Lovenox®) 40 mg sc 1 × day or nadroparin (Flaxiparine®, Fraxiparin®) 0.6 mL sc 1 ×

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . . 22 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . . 24 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

�Veress�Needle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25�First�Port�(11�mm,�optic�0°) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25�Second�Port�(5�mm,�monopolar�round-tipped�scissors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26�Third�Port�(11�mm,�bipolar�grasper) . . . . . . . . . . 27�Fourth�Port�(5�mm,�suction�device) . . . . . . . . . . 27�Fifth�Port�(5�mm,�liver�retractor�grasper) . . . . . 27�Final�Position�of�the�Ports�(see�Figs.�8�and�9) 27

Surgical Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27�Colon�Mobilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27�Ureter�and�Gonadal�Vessels�Identification . . . 28�Exposure�and�Dissection�of�the�Renal�Hilum 30�Renal�Hilum�Ligature�and�Transection . . . . . . . 32�Mobilization�of�the�Kidney�and�Adrenal�Gland 32�Transection�of�the�Ureter� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33�Kidney�Extraction� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33�Closure�of�the�Abdominal�Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical Nephrectomy

Chapter 2

Page 28: Manual of laparoscopic urology

22 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

day is initiated on day 1 after the surgery and continued daily until the patient is discharged from the hospital. In selected cases, the treatment is continued for 30 days after the procedure. Patients also receive antibiotic pro-phylaxis with a single preoperative dose of intravenous second-generation cephalosporin, unless they are aller-gic to penicillin. Blood type and crossmatch are deter-mined.

�Patient�Positioning�and�Initial�Preparation�

The patient is initially positioned supine for intravenous access, induction of general anesthesia, and endotra-cheal intubation. An orogastric tube is placed and the stomach decompressed to avoid puncture during trocar placement and to allow additional space during abdom-inal insufflation. An 18Fr Foley catheter with 10 mL in the balloon is introduced for decompression of the blad-der. During skin preparation, the entire flank and abdo-men are included in case conversion to an open proce-dure is required. The umbilicus is placed over the break in the operating table, and the patient is positioned in a modified lateral decubitus position.

T I P

For a left-side nephrectomy, the patient is placed in a strict lateral decubitus position.

The table can be flexed as needed, or an inflatable bal-loon is positioned under the patient at the level of the umbilicus. Padding is used to support the buttocks and dorsum, and all potential pressure points are cushioned. An axillary roll is placed to prevent brachial plexus in-jury, and the arms should be positioned as far away from the trunk as possible so as not to disturb the movement of the operative team. The patient is held in position with strips of cloth tape (Fig. 1a,b).

The surgeon operates from the abdominal side of the patient, and the first assistant is placed caudally to the surgeon. The laparoscopic cart is positioned at the back of the patient’s chest with the operative team facing the video monitor. The instruments table is positioned be-hind the operative team, and the assistant is positioned higher than the surgeon to prevent the laparoscopic in-struments from conflicting (Fig. 2a–d).

F I g . � 1

a�Patient�position.�b�Padding

Page 29: Manual of laparoscopic urology

23Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical NephrectomyChapter 2

F I g . � 2

a Patient� and� laparoscopic� cart.� b� Steps� below� assistant.�c� Instruments� table� behind� operative� team.� d� Operative�team’s�position

Page 30: Manual of laparoscopic urology

24 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

�Trocars�and�Laparoscopic�Instruments�

Right-side nephrectomy: 2 × 11 mm (optic 0° and bipolar grasper) 3 × 5 mm (monopolar scissors, suction device, and liver retractor grasper)

Left-side nephrectomy: 2 × 11 mm (optic 0°, bipolar grasper, and 10-mm clip applier) 2 × 5 mm (scissors and suction device) Monopolar round-tipped scissors, bipolar grasper, liver retractor grasper, 5-mm suction device, 10-mm clip applier (non-disposable), needle drivers (2), and 10-mm laparoscopic optic 0°

••

••

�Access�and�Port�Placement

Four ports are generally enough to perform the proce-dure, although a fifth trocar may be necessary for liver retraction during a right-side nephrectomy (Fig. 3). Be-fore trocars are placed, the abdomen is insufflated using a Veress needle.

T I P

In case of previous surgery, the Veress needle is not inserted, and the open access technique is used to place the first trocar.

F I g . � 3

Access�and�port�placement�(This�figure�was�published�in�Wein:�Campbell-Walsh�Urology,�9th�ed.,�Copyright�Elsevier)

Page 31: Manual of laparoscopic urology

25Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical NephrectomyChapter 2

T I P

Pneumoperitoneum is established with an intra-abdominal pressure higher than 10 mmHg.

�Veress�Needle

A cutaneous incision is made two fingerbreadths below the costal margin arch, at the level of the lateral border of the rectus muscle (Fig. 4a,b).

T I P

The skin incision should be 50% larger than the diameter of the 11-mm trocar.

The Veress needle is introduced through the incision (see Chap. 1, Veress Needle Introduction).

�First�Port�(11�mm,�optic�0°)

Once pneumoperitoneum is established, the Veress needle is removed, and the 11-mm trocar is introduced through the same incision, perpendicularly to the ab-dominal wall (Fig. 5).

F I g . � 4

a�Cutaneous�incision�below�costal�margin.�b�Insertion�of�Veress�needle�

F I g . � 5

Perpendicular�introduction�of�the�trocar

Page 32: Manual of laparoscopic urology

26 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

The optic is introduced through the trocar, and the abdomen is then inspected for any injury due to inser-tion of the Veress needle or the trocar, and to identify adhesions in areas where the secondary ports will be placed.

T I P

After trocar placement and obturator removal, the trocar valve is briefly opened to check for egress of gas, confirming it is correctly placed inside the abdomen. The insufflator line is then connected to the trocar.

�Second�Port�(5�mm,��monopolar�round-tipped�scissors)

The triangulation rule must be followed for the place-ment of the trocars as the body habitus is different for each patient: four fingerbreadths between the optic trocar and the working trocars (Fig. 6), and five fingerbreadths between the working trocars (Fig. 7a,b).

T I P

To prevent lens fogging, insert the distal end of the optic into warm sterile water or saline before intra-abdominal optic introduction.

F I g . � 6

Triangulation�rule,�four�fingers�

F I g . � 7

a�Triangulation�rule,�five�fingers.�b�Ports�in�place

Page 33: Manual of laparoscopic urology

27Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical NephrectomyChapter 2

T I P

The 5-mm port is usually reserved for the most skilled hand, as the movements of the working instruments must be more precise inside the smaller ports.

�Third�Port�(11�mm,�bipolar�grasper)

The triangulation rule must be followed as above.

�Fourth�Port�(5�mm,�suction�device)

For the introduction of the 5-mm trocar, a cutaneous incision is made approximately midline between the umbilicus trocar and the anterior superior iliac spine on the side of the procedure.

�Fifth�Port�(5�mm,�liver�retractor�grasper)

If liver retraction is necessary during a right-side ne-phrectomy, a cutaneous incision is made approximately two fingerbreadths below the level of the second port, and a 5-mm port is introduced (Fig. 8).

�Final�Position�of�the�Ports�(see�Figs.�8�and�9)

�Surgical�Technique

�Colon�Mobilization

For a left-side nephrectomy, the plane between the descending colon and the underlying Gerota’s fascia is developed to allow the colon to fall medially (Fig. 10a–c).

T I P

The lateral attachments of Gerota’s fascia to the abdominal wall should not be freed at this time to avoid the kidney falling medially into the op-erating field.

F I g . � 8

Right-side�ports

F I g . � 9

Left-side�ports

Page 34: Manual of laparoscopic urology

28 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

This plane of dissection is carried out cranially. The splenorenal and lienocolic ligaments are incised, allow-ing the spleen and the tail of the pancreas to be sepa-rated from the upper pole of the kidney. The en bloc dissection of the colon, spleen, and pancreas must be completed for adequate exposure of the renal vein (Fig. 11a,b).

For a right-side nephrectomy, the liver is cranially re-tracted using a grasper that is fixed to the abdominal wall (Fig. 12). The ascending colon is mobilized and dis-sected from the underlying Gerota’s fascia. Mobilization of the colon continues caudally to the common iliac ves-sels.

�Ureter�and�gonadal�Vessels�Identification

Following the medial mobilization of the colon and me-socolon, the gonadal vessels are visualized. After the co-lon is medially retracted, the Gerota’s fatty tissue at the level of the lower pole of the kidney is incised and lifted to locate the psoas muscle (Fig. 13).

T I P

The correct maneuver to expose the psoas muscle is the continuous upper movement of the laparo-scopic instruments to lift the fatty tissue.

F I g . � 1 0

a�Colon�attachments�to�abdominal�wall.�b Release�of�colon�attachments� to� abdominal� wall.� c� Colon� is� dissected� from�Gerota’s�fascia�(Gerota�is�not�freed�from�abdominal�wall)

Page 35: Manual of laparoscopic urology

29Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical NephrectomyChapter 2

The psoas is followed to expose the ureter just lateral and deep to the gonadal vessels.

Caudally, the ureter is dissected and freed until the crossing of the iliac vessels. The ureter and gonadal ves-

sels are not divided at this time. Both structures are lifted and, by visualization of the psoas muscle (Fig. 14a,b), followed cranially to the lower pole and hilum of the kidney (Fig. 15a,b).

F I g . � 1 1

a�Spleen�is�released�from�kidney.�b�En�bloc�spleen�dissection�

F I g . � 1 2

Grasper�retracting�liver

F I g . � 1 3

Lifting�of�fatty�tissue�to�expose�psoas�muscle

Page 36: Manual of laparoscopic urology

30 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

The dissection of the right gonadal vein is not nec-essary, as it enters the vena cava on this side. Attach-ments between the psoas muscle and Gerota’s fascia are released by sharp and blunt dissection, and small vessels to the ureter and branches of the gonadal vein are co-agulated with the bipolar grasper.

�Exposure�and�Dissection�of�the�Renal�Hilum

On the left, tracking the course of the left gonadal vein into the renal vein and firm elevation of the lower pole of the kidney on both sides assists in the identification and blunt dissection of the renal hilum.

F I g . � 1 4

a�Dissection�of�ureter�and�gonadal�vessels.�b�Psoas�muscle

F I g . � 1 5

a�Psoas�is�followed�cranially�to�hilum.�b�Ureter�and�gonadal�vessels�approaching�renal�hilum�

Page 37: Manual of laparoscopic urology

31Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical NephrectomyChapter 2

The renal vessels should be individually dissected (Fig. 16a,b).

The renal vein is dissected, taking care with the lum-bar veins that drain posterior to the vessel (Fig. 17a,b). The left adrenal vein is preserved if the ipsilateral adre-nal gland is not removed.

T I P

Dissection of the right renal vein is usually less demanding as lumbar veins are normally absent at this side.

F I g . � 1 6

a�Renal�hilum�exposed.�b�Dissection�of�renal�vessels�

F I g . � 1 7

a Left�adrenal�vein�(Adr);�Gonadal�vein�(Gon).�b�Renal�vein�(V);�Renal�artery�(A)

Page 38: Manual of laparoscopic urology

32 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

The renal artery is exposed posterior to the renal vein and dissected (Fig. 18a,b).

�Renal�Hilum�Ligature�and�Transection

Hem-o-lok® polymer clips (Weck, Teleflex Medical) are applied to the artery.

T I P

One extra-large (XL) clip secures the renal ar-tery before the renal vein is clipped.

Three clips (XL Hem-o-lok) are used on the renal vein, which is then carefully transected.

T I P

The renal vein should be flat after the renal ar-tery clip is placed; if the vein is still filling, an-other renal artery should be located.

Following division of the renal vein, clipping of the renal artery is completed (3 XL Hem-o-lok clips), and the ves-sel is then transected.

�Mobilization�of�the�Kidney�and�Adrenal�gland

Once all the hilar vessels have been divided, the dissec-tion continues posteriorly and superiorly to the upper pole. The attachments of the kidney to the posterior and lateral abdominal wall are released by blunt and sharp dissection, taking care to coagulate the bleeding vessels. The adrenal gland can be preserved in a simple nephrectomy and particular cases of mid- and lower-pole tumors, but otherwise are removed intact with the specimen. This is accomplished by incising Gerota’s fascia anteriorly just above the hilum (Fig. 19). Gerota’s fascia is then gently peeled off circumferentially above the upper pole of the kidney. At this point during the dissection, care must be taken with the short adrenal vein on the right side that drains posterolateral into the vena cava. On the right, superior retraction of the liver facilitates the dissection of the plane between the liver and the upper pole of the kidney (Fig. 20).

F I g . � 1 8

a�Renal�artery�posterior�to�renal�vein.�b�Dissection�of�the�renal�artery

Page 39: Manual of laparoscopic urology

33Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical NephrectomyChapter 2

The kidney is placed intact inside the bag and the speci-men is removed.

T I P

The string of the bag is pulled out to close it, and the arm of the device is retracted to liberate the metal ring.

�Closure�of�the�Abdominal�Wall

The abdominal wall is closed using running Vicryl 2-0 SH 1 Plus (needle ½ 21.8 mm) for the peritoneum, Vicryl 0 suture in “X” for the muscle, and running Vic-ryl 1 CT Plus (needle ½ 39.9 mm) for the aponeurosis. Once the abdominal wall is closed, pneumoperitoneum is re-established and the optic introduced for revision of the hemostasis. A silicone Penrose drain is inserted. Af-ter evacuation of the pneumoperitoneum and removal of the trocars, the aponeurosis of the 11-mm ports is closed with a Dexon™ II HGU-46 suture. The skin in-

�Transection�of�the�Ureter�

Inferiorly, the ureter is double-clipped with (L) Hem-o-lok® clips and transected to allow the kidney to be fully mobilized. This facilitates the dissection and incision of the lateroposterior and uppermost attachments under direct vision.

T I P

Both ureteral ends are clipped to avoid urine spillage in case a transitional cell carcinoma is present.

�Kidney�Extraction�

A lower ilioinguinal muscle-splitting incision (Gib-son type) is performed, but the muscle attached to the peritoneum is not incised. A large laparoscopic bag (Endo Catch® II 15 mm, Tyco Autosuture) is introduced through the small opening of the ilioinguinal incision.

F I g . � 1 9

Left�adrenal�vein�(A);�Left�renal�vein�(B);�Gonadal�vein�(C)

F I g . � 2 0

Plane�between�kidney�and�liver

Page 40: Manual of laparoscopic urology

34 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

cisions are closed with subcuticular Monocryl® 3-0 C 423.

�Postoperative�Considerations

The nasogastric tube is removed at the end of the proce-dure, and the intravenous perfusion is stopped on day 1. Pain is controlled with scheduled intramuscular nonste-roidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs) and oral an-algesics. Intramuscular NSAIDs are often discontinued after 24 hours. A light diet can generally be resumed one day after surgery. The Foley catheter is usually removed on day 1 and the Penrose drain on day 2 after surgery. The patient leaves the hospital on the third or fourth postoperative day. Patients can resume normal light ac-tivities after hospital discharge, but vigorous activities and heavy lifting are limited for at least one month after surgery.

�Suggested�Readings

Hemal AK, Kumar A: Laparoscopic versus open radical ne-phrectomy for large renal tumors: a long-term prospective comparison. J Urol 2007 Mar; 177(3):862–866.Mattar K, Finelli A: Expanding the indications for lapa-roscopic radical nephrectomy. Curr Opin Urol 2007 Mar; 17(2):88–92.Kouba E, Smith AM: Efficacy and safety of en bloc ligation of renal hilum during laparoscopic nephrectomy. Urology 2007 Feb; 69(2):226–229.Permpongkosol S, Link RE: Complications of 2,775 uro-logical laparoscopic procedures: 1993 to 2005. J Urol 2007 Feb; 177(2):580–585.Gong EM, Lyon MB: Laparoscopic radical nephrectomy: comparison of clinical Stage T1 and T2 renal tumors. Urol-ogy 2006 Dec; 68(6):1183–1187.Romero FR, Muntener M: Pure laparoscopic radical ne-phrectomy with level II vena caval thrombectomy. Urology 2006 Nov; 68(5):1112–1114. Ono Y, Hattori R: Laparoscopic radical nephrectomy for re-nal cell carcinoma: the standard of care already? Curr Opin Urol. 2005 Mar; 15(2):75–78.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Page 41: Manual of laparoscopic urology

�Introduction

Since the introduction of cross-sectional imaging for the diagnosis of intra-abdominal pathologies, an increased number of small renal masses are being incidentally discovered. These lesions are often peripherally located, with a benign histology in less than half of the cases. Following removal, no significant differences in sur-vival rates exist between patients who have undergone partial or radical nephrectomy. In addition, the local recurrence rate after nephron-sparing surgery (NSS) is less than 3%. For all of these reasons, and motivated by the benefits of decreased patient morbidity and fast re-covery, laparoscopic partial nephrectomy is successfully becoming the standard of care for the surgical manage-ment of exophytic renal tumors 4 cm in diameter or smaller. However, despite the potential advantages of nephron-sparing surgery and the laparoscopic approach over open surgery, laparoscopic partial nephrectomy is still not widely performed because of technical difficul-ties inherent to the procedure. There is ongoing debate regarding the need for complete hilar clamping, warm ischemia time, and the use of haemostatic techniques af-ter tumor removal. Even in skilled hands, this complex procedure is still evolving. The technique described uses a transperitoneal route and an extracorporeal clamp ap-proach of delayed occlusion and early release of the re-nal pedicle to minimize warm ischemia time.

�Preoperative�Preparation

Before a patient consents to a laparoscopic partial ne-phrectomy, it is important to discuss the specific risks of the surgery, including the potential need to convert to the traditional open operation if difficulties arise.

Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Partial Nephrectomy

Chapter 3

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . . 36 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . . 37 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

�Veress�Needle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38�First�Port�(11�mm,�optic�0°) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38�Second�Port�(5�mm,�monopolar�round-tipped�scissors) . . . 39�Third�Port�(11�mm,�bipolar�grasper) . . . . . . . . . . 40�Fourth�Port�(5�mm,�suction�device) . . . . . . . . . . 40�Fifth�Port�(5�mm,�liver�retractor�grasper) . . . . . 40�Sixth�Port�(11�mm,�Satinsky�vascular�clamp) 41�Final�Position�of�the�Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Surgical Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41�Colon�Mobilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41�Ureter�and�Gonadal�Vessels�Identification . . . 43�Exposure�and�Dissection�of�the�Renal�Hilum 43�Localization�of�the�Kidney�Tumor . . . . . . . . . . . . 44�Tumor�Resection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44�Closure�of�the�Abdominal�Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Page 42: Manual of laparoscopic urology

36 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

The patient is admitted to the hospital the night be-fore the surgery for bowel preparation, which includes 2 L of Colopeg® (1 envelope/L) p.o. and a Fleet® enema. Fasting starts at midnight before surgery. Thrombopro-phylaxis protocol is implemented with good hydration, placement of compressive elastic stockings on the lower extremities, and low-molecular-weight heparin. Enoxa-parin (Clexane®, Lovenox®) 40 mg sc 1 × day or nad-roparin (Flaxiparine®, Fraxiparin®) 0.6 mL sc 1 × day is initiated on day 1 after the surgery and continued daily until the patient is discharged from the hospital. In selected cases, the treatment is continued for 30 days after the procedure. Patients also receive antibiotic pro-phylaxis with a single preoperative dose of intravenous second-generation cephalosporin, unless they are aller-gic to penicillin. Blood type and crossmatch are deter-mined.

�Patient�Positioning�and�Initial�Preparation

The patient is initially positioned supine for IV access, the induction of general anesthesia, and endotracheal intubation. An orogastric tube is placed and the stomach decompressed to avoid puncture during trocar place-

ment and to allow additional space during abdominal insufflation. An 18Fr Foley catheter with 10 mL in the balloon is introduced for decompression of the bladder. During skin preparation, the entire flank and abdomen are included in case conversion to an open procedure is required. The umbilicus is placed over the break in the operating table, and the patient is positioned in a modi-fied lateral decubitus position.

T I P

For a left-side nephrectomy, the patient is placed in a strict lateral decubitus position.

The table can be flexed as needed, or an inflatable bal-loon is positioned under the patient at the level of the umbilicus. Padding is used to support the buttocks and dorsum, and all potential pressure points are cushioned. An axillary roll is placed to prevent brachial plexus in-jury, and the arms should be positioned as far away from the trunk as possible so as not to disturb the movement of the operative team. The patient is held in position with strips of cloth tape (Fig. 1a,b).

The surgeon operates from the abdominal side of the

F I g . � 1

a�Patient�position.�b�Padding

Page 43: Manual of laparoscopic urology

37Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Partial NephrectomyChapter 3

F I g . � 2

a Patient� and� laparoscopic� cart.� b� Steps� below� assistant.�c�Instruments�table�behind�operative�team

patient, and the first assistant is placed caudally to the surgeon. The laparoscopic cart is positioned at the back of the patient’s chest with the operative team facing the video monitor. The instruments table is positioned be-hind the operative team, and the assistant is positioned higher than the surgeon to prevent laparoscopic instru-ments from conflicting (Fig. 2a–c).

�Trocars�and�Laparoscopic�Instruments�

3 × 11 mm (optic 0°, Satinsky vascular clamp, and bipolar grasper) 3 × 5 mm for right-side partial nephrectomy (scis-sors, suction device, and liver retractor grasper)

2 × 5 mm for left-side partial nephrectomy (scissors and suction device) Monopolar round-tipped scissors, bipolar grasper, Satinsky vascular clamp, liver retractor grasper, 5-mm suction device, needle drivers (2), and 10-mm laparoscopic optic 0°

�Access�and�Port�Placement

Five ports are generally enough to perform the pro-cedure, although a sixth trocar may be necessary for liver retraction during a right-side partial nephrectomy (Fig. 3). Before trocars are placed, the abdomen is insuf-flated using a Veress needle.

Page 44: Manual of laparoscopic urology

38 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

T I P

In case of previous surgery, the Veress needle is not inserted, and the open access technique is used to place the first trocar.

�Veress�Needle

A cutaneous incision is made two fingerbreadths below the costal margin arch in the midaxillary line, lateral to the ipsilateral rectus muscle (Fig. 4a,b).

T I P

The skin incision should be 50% larger than the diameter of the 11-mm trocar.

The Veress needle is introduced through the incision (see Chap. 1, Veress Needle Introduction).

�First�Port�(11�mm,�optic�0°)

Once pneumoperitoneum is established, the Veress needle is removed, and the 11-mm trocar is introduced through the same incision, perpendicularly to the ab-dominal wall (Fig. 5).

F I g . � 3

Access�and�port�placement�(This�figure�was�published�in�Wein:�Campbell-Walsh�Urology,�9th�ed.,�Copyright�Elsevier)

Page 45: Manual of laparoscopic urology

39Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Partial NephrectomyChapter 3

T I P

Pneumoperitoneum is established with an intra-abdominal pressure higher than 10 mmHg.

The optic is introduced through the trocar, and the abdomen is then inspected for any injury due to inser-tion of the Veress needle or the trocar, and to identify adhesions in areas where the secondary ports will be placed.

T I P

After trocar placement and obturator removal, the trocar valve is briefly opened to check for egress of gas, confirming it is correctly placed inside the abdomen. The insufflator line is then connected to the trocar.

�Second�Port�(5�mm,�monopolar�round-tipped�scissors)

The triangulation rule must be followed for the place-ment of the trocars as the body habitus is different for each patient: four fingerbreadths between the optic trocar and the working trocars (Fig. 6), and five fingerbreadths between the working trocars (Fig. 7a,b).

F I g . � 4

a�Cutaneous�incision�below�costal�margin.�b�Insertion�of�Veress�needle�

F I g . � 5

Perpendicular�introduction�of�the�trocar

Page 46: Manual of laparoscopic urology

40 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

T I P

The skin incision should be 50% larger than the diameter of the trocar.

�Third�Port�(11�mm,�bipolar�grasper)

The triangulation rule must be followed as above.

�Fourth�Port�(5�mm,�suction�device)

For the introduction of the 5-mm trocar, a cutaneous incision is made approximately midline between the umbilicus trocar and the anterior superior iliac spine on the side of the procedure.

�Fifth�Port�(5�mm,�liver�retractor�grasper)

If liver retraction is necessary during a right-side par-tial nephrectomy, a cutaneous incision is made approxi-

F I g . � 6

Triangulation�rule,�four�fingers�

F I g . � 7

a�Triangulation�rule,�five�fingers.�b�Ports�in�place

Page 47: Manual of laparoscopic urology

41Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Partial NephrectomyChapter 3

mately two fingerbreadths below the level of the second port, and a 5-mm port is introduced (Fig. 8).

�Sixth�Port�(11�mm,�Satinsky�vascular�clamp)

A cutaneous incision is made approximately in line with the most caudal trocar but placed slightly infe-rior to the umbilicus (Fig. 9).

T I P

The 11-mm trocar for the Satinsky vascular clamp is inserted only after the exposure and dissection of the renal hilum.

�Final�Position�of�the�Ports

The ports are tied to the skin with Vicryl® 2-0 to prevent accidental removal.

�Surgical�Technique

�Colon�Mobilization

For a left-side partial nephrectomy, the plane between the descending colon and the underlying Gerota’s fas-cia is developed to allow the colon to fall medially (Fig. 10a–c).

T I P

The lateral attachments of the kidney to the ab-dominal wall should not be freed at this time to avoid the kidney falling medially into the oper-ating field.

This plane of dissection is carried out cranially. The splenorenal and lienocolic ligaments are incised, allowing the spleen and the tail of the pancreas to be separated from the upper pole of the kidney (Fig. 11a,b).

F I g . � 8

Right-side�ports

F I g . � 9

11-mm�port�for�introduction�of�Satinsky�vascular�clamp�(A)

Page 48: Manual of laparoscopic urology

42 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

F I g . � 1 0

a�Colon�attachments�to�abdominal�wall.�b Release�of�colon�attachments� to� abdominal� wall.� c� Colon� is� dissected� from�Gerota’s�fascia�(Gerota�is�not�freed�from�abdominal�wall)

F I g . � 1 1

a�Spleen�is�released�from�kidney.�b�En�bloc�spleen�dissection�

Page 49: Manual of laparoscopic urology

43Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Partial NephrectomyChapter 3

T I P

In this maneuver, the weight of the spleen dis-sected en bloc opens the space spontaneously.

For a right-side partial nephrectomy, the liver is crani-ally retracted using a grasper that is fixed to the abdomi-nal wall (Fig. 12).

The ascending colon is mobilized and dissected from the underlying Gerota’s fascia. Colon mobilization con-tinues caudally to the common iliac vessels to expose the lower pole of the kidney, the ureter, and the gonadal vessels.

�Ureter�and�gonadal�Vessels��Identification

After the colon is medially retracted, the Gerota’s fatty tissue at the level of the lower pole of the kidney is in-cised and lifted to locate the psoas muscle (Fig. 13).

T I P

The correct maneuver to expose the psoas muscle is the continuous upper movement of the laparo-scopic instruments to lift the fatty tissue.

The psoas is followed to expose the gonadal vessels and the ureter just lateral and deep to these vessels. Both structures are elevated and, by visualization of the psoas muscle (Fig. 14a,b), followed cranially to the lower pole and hilum of the kidney.

Attachments between the psoas muscle and Gerota’s fascia are released with sharp and blunt dissection, and small vessels to the ureter and branches of the gonadal vein are coagulated with the bipolar grasper.

�Exposure�and�Dissection�of�the�Renal�Hilum

On the left, tracking the course of the left gonadal vein into the renal vein and firm elevation of the lower pole of the kidney on both sides assists in the identification and blunt dissection of the renal hilum (Fig. 15).

The renal vein is dissected, taking care with the lum-bar veins that drain posterior to the vessel. The renal artery is routinely not dissected. The Satinsky vascular clamp is introduced and positioned around the pedicle, but it is not clamped at this time (Figs. 9 and 16a,b).

The renal vessels should be clamped en bloc, but a single vein is left unclamped to permit venous drainage in case an accessory renal artery was missed and not properly secured (Fig. 17a,b).

F I g . � 1 2

Grasper�retracting�liver

F I g . � 1 3

Lifting�of�fatty�tissue�to�expose�psoas�muscle

Page 50: Manual of laparoscopic urology

44 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

F I g . � 1 4

a�Dissection�of�ureter�and�gonadal�vessels.�b�Psoas�muscle

F I g . � 1 5

a�Psoas�is�followed�cranially�to�hilum.�b�Ureter�and�gonadal�vessels�approaching�renal�hilum�

T I P

The en bloc clamping of the pedicle using a large Satinsky clamp is technically faster as less dis-section is required, but there is always a risk of parenchymal flow overpressure due to a missed polar artery, which can jeopardize bleeding con-trol. For this reason, it is safer to completely dis-sect the kidney to exclude an accessory artery when performing the en bloc hilar control.

�Localization�of�the�Kidney�Tumor

The Gerota’s fascia overlying the area where the tumor is likely to be found is incised with monopolar scissors (Fig. 18). Palpation with the tip of the instrument also aids in this objective.

�Tumor�Resection

The fatty tissue overlying the tumor is removed and sent to pathology. The surface of the renal cortex bordering the lesion is stripped of fatty tissue to permit good visu-alization of the lateral margins of the tumor (Fig. 19).

Page 51: Manual of laparoscopic urology

45Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Partial NephrectomyChapter 3

F I g . � 1 6

a�Satinsky�vascular�clamp�(S).�b�Satinsky�around�the�pedicle�

F I g . � 1 7

a�Satinsky�vascular�clamp�around�the�hilum.�b�Renal�vein�left�unclamped�

F I g . � 1 8

Gerota’s�fascia�incised�over�tumor�

Page 52: Manual of laparoscopic urology

46 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

The Gerota’s fascia is mobilized beyond the margins of the wedge resection to facilitate posterior kidney reconstruction. After delimitating a tumor-free mar-gin of at least 0.5 cm, the cortex and renal parenchyma around the nodule are incised with monopolar scissors. At this time, if necessary, the pedicle is clamped and the ischemia time begins. The renal parenchyma bor-dering the nodule is coagulated and cut with the same instrument, and the tumor is completely excised (Fig. 20a–c).

If a renal calyx is opened during the resection, a run-ning suture of Vicryl 2-0 is used to close the defect fol-lowing tumor removal (Fig. 21a,b).

Interrupted U-shaped sutures of Vicryl 0 GS 24 are placed through the Gerota and the renal parenchyma (Fig. 22).F I g . � 1 9

Renal�cortex�surface�around�nodule�stripped�of�fatty�tissue

F I g . � 2 0

a�Demarcation�of�the� incision.�b�Renal�parenchyma�is�cut.�c�Tumor�excision

Page 53: Manual of laparoscopic urology

47Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Partial NephrectomyChapter 3

Two Surgicel® bolsters 10 × 20 cm are placed under the loose loops of the suture to fill in the defect and help with the hemostasis (Fig. 23).

The knot is gently and carefully tied to avoid tearing of the parenchyma. The vascular clamp is opened, and any eventual bleeding is controlled with a further Vicryl 0 suture (Fig. 24).

F I g . � 2 1

a�Open�calyx.�b�Suture�closing�open�calyx

F I g . � 2 2

U-shaped� sutures� are� placed� through� the� Gerota� and� the�renal�parenchyma

F I g . � 2 3

Surgical�bolsters

�Closure�of�the�Abdominal�Wall

The specimen is placed in an Endo Catch® bag (Tyco Autosuture), and the incision is enlarged for specimen removal. A 12-mm silicone Penrose drain is introduced. The aponeurosis of the 11-mm ports is closed with a Dexon™ II HGU-46 suture, and the skin incisions are

Page 54: Manual of laparoscopic urology

48 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

on day 1 after surgery. The Foley catheter is usually re-moved on the first post-operative day, and the Penrose drain is removed before discharge or when drainage is less than 50 mL. Patients can resume normal light ac-tivities after hospital discharge, but vigorous activities and heavy lifting are limited for at least one month after surgery.

�Suggested�Readings

Orvieto MA, Zorn KC: Recovery of renal function af-ter complete renal hilar versus artery alone clamping during open and laparoscopic surgery. J Urol 2007 Jun; 177(6):2371–2374.Verhoest G, Manunta A: Laparoscopic partial nephrectomy with clamping of the renal parenchyma: initial experience. Eur Urol 2007 Nov; 52(5):1340–6.Bollens R, Rosenblatt A: Laparoscopic partial nephrectomy with “on-demand” clamping reduces warm ischemia time. Eur Urol 2007 Apr; 52(3): 804–810.Van Dijk JH, Pes PL: Haemostasis in laparoscopic partial nephrectomy: current status. Minim Invasive Ther Allied Technol 2007; 16(1):31–44.Häcker A, Albadour A: Nephron-sparing surgery for renal tumours: acceleration and facilitation of the laparoscopic technique. Eur Urol 2007 Feb; 51(2):358–365. Breda A, Stepanian SV: Use of haemostatic agents and glues during laparoscopic partial nephrectomy: a multi-institu-tional survey from the United States and Europe of 1347 cases. Eur Urol 2007 Feb; 52(3):798–803.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

closed with running intradermic Monocryl® 3-0. The Penrose is sutured to the skin with Flexidene® 2-0, and the skin incision is closed with an Opsite® dressing.

�Postoperative�Considerations

The nasogastric tube is removed at the end of the pro-cedure, and the intravenous perfusion is stopped on day 1. Pain is controlled with scheduled intramuscular non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs) and oral analgesics. Intramuscular NSAIDs are often discontin-ued after 24 h. A light diet can generally be resumed

F I g . � 2 4

Final�result

Page 55: Manual of laparoscopic urology

�Introduction

In recent years, laparoscopic nephroureterectomy has been developed and applied to patients with transitional cell carcinoma (TCC) of the renal pelvis and ureter. The laparoscopic approach results in less blood loss, fewer postoperative pain and analgesic requirements, and faster recovery to normal activity compared with open nephroureterectomy. The main issue of this procedure is the oncologic control, particularly the management of the distal ureter. The en bloc ureteral resection to avoid tumor spillage is the preferred method, and many inno-vative techniques have been used to address the subject.

With the technique here described, the kidney and proximal ureter are dissected laparoscopically by way of a transperitoneal approach, and an ilioinguinal incision (Gibson-type) is performed for continued dissection of the distal ureter with a cuff of bladder. The abdominal incision permits safe specimen removal, reducing the technical complexity of the procedure and operative times.

�Preoperative�Preparation

Before a patient consents to a laparoscopic nephroure-terectomy, it is important to discuss the specific risks of the surgery, including the potential need to convert to the traditional open operation if difficulties arise.

The patient is admitted to the hospital the day before the surgery for bowel preparation, which includes 2 L of Colopeg® (1 envelope/L) p.o. and a Fleet® enema. Fasting starts at midnight before surgery. Thrombo-prophylaxis protocol is implemented with good hydra-tion, placement of compressive elastic stockings on the lower extremities, and low-molecular-weight heparin. Enoxaparin (Clexane®, Lovenox®) 40 mg sc 1 × day or

Laparoscopic Assisted Transperitoneal Nephroureterectomy

Chapter 4

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . . 50 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . . 52 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

�Veress�Needle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53�First�Port�(11�mm,�optic�0°) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53�Second�Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54�Third�Port� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55�Fourth�Port�(5�mm,�suction�device) . . . . . . . . . . 55�Fifth�Port�(5�mm,�liver�retractor�grasper) . . . . . 55

Access for the Lower Ureteral Dissection . . . . . . 56 Surgical Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

�Colon�Mobilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56�Ureter�and�Gonadal�Vessels�Identification . . . 58�Exposure�and�Dissection�of�the�Renal�Hilum 60�Renal�Hilum�Ligature�and�Transection . . . . . . . 60�Mobilization�of�the�Kidney�and�Adrenal�Gland 61�Kidney�Extraction�and�Distal�Ureteral�Dissection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61�Closure�of�the�Abdominal�Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Page 56: Manual of laparoscopic urology

50 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

nadroparin (Flaxiparine®, Fraxiparin®) 0.6 mL sc 1 × day is initiated on day 1 after the surgery and continued daily until the patient is discharged from the hospital. In selected cases, the treatment is continued for 30 days after the procedure. Patients also receive antibiotic pro-phylaxis with a single preoperative dose of intravenous second-generation cephalosporin, unless they are aller-gic to penicillin. Blood type and crossmatch are deter-mined.

�Patient�Positioning�and�Initial�Preparation�

The patient is initially positioned supine for intravenous access, the induction of general anesthesia, and endotra-cheal intubation. An orogastric tube is placed and the stomach decompressed to avoid puncture during trocar placement and to allow additional space during abdom-inal insufflation. An 18Fr Foley catheter with 10 mL in the balloon is introduced for bladder decompression. During skin preparation, the entire flank and abdomen are included in case conversion to an open procedure is required. The umbilicus is placed over the break in the

operating table, and the patient is positioned in a modi-fied lateral decubitus position.

T I P

For a left-side nephroureterectomy, the patient is placed in a strict lateral decubitus position.

The table can be flexed as needed, or an inflatable bal-loon is positioned under the patient at the level of the umbilicus. Padding is used to support the buttocks and dorsum, and all potential pressure points are cushioned. An axillary roll is placed to prevent brachial plexus in-jury, and the arms should be positioned as far away from the trunk as possible so as not to disturb the movement of the operative team. The patient is held in position with strips of cloth tape (Fig. 1a,b).

The surgeon operates from the abdominal side of the patient, and the first assistant is placed caudally to the surgeon. The laparoscopic cart is positioned at the back of the patient’s chest with the operative team facing the video monitor. The instruments table is positioned

F I g . � 1

a�Patient’s�position.�b�Padding

Page 57: Manual of laparoscopic urology

51Laparoscopic Assisted NephroureterectomyChapter 4

F I g . � 2

a Patient� and� laparoscopic� cart.� b� Steps� below� assistant.�c� Instruments� table� behind� operative� team.� d� Operative�team’s�position

Page 58: Manual of laparoscopic urology

52 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

behind the operative team, and the assistant stands on steps (Fig. 2a–d).

�Trocars�and�Laparoscopic�Instruments�

Right-side nephroureterectomy: 2 × 11 mm (optic 0°, bipolar grasper, 10 mm-clip ap-plier) 3 × 5 mm (monopolar scissors, suction device, and liver retractor grasper)

Left-side nephroureterectomy: 2 × 11 mm (optic 0° and bipolar grasper) 2 × 5 mm (scissors and suction device)

••

Monopolar round-tipped scissors, bipolar grasper, liver retractor grasper, 5-mm suction device, Ethi-con 10-mm clip applier (non-disposable), needle drivers (2), and 10-mm laparoscopic optic 0°

�Access�and�Port�Placement

Four ports are generally sufficient to complete the pro-cedure, although a fifth trocar may be necessary for liver retraction during a right-side nephroureterectomy (Fig. 3).

F I g . � 3

Access�and�port�placement�(This�figure�was�published�in�Wein:�Campbell-Walsh�Urology,�9th�ed.,�Copyright�Elsevier)

Page 59: Manual of laparoscopic urology

53Laparoscopic Assisted NephroureterectomyChapter 4

�Veress�Needle

A cutaneous incision is made two fingerbreadths below the costal margin arch, at the level of the lateral border of the rectus muscle (Fig. 4a,b).

T I P

The skin incision should be 50% larger than the diameter of the 11-mm trocar.

The Veress needle is introduced through the incision (see Chap. 1, Veress Needle Introduction).

�First�Port�(11�mm,�optic�0°)

Once pneumoperitoneum is established, the needle is removed, and the 11-mm trocar is introduced through the same incision, perpendicularly to the abdominal wall (Fig. 5).

T I P

Pneumoperitoneum is established with an intra-abdominal pressure higher than 10 mmHg.

F I g . � 4

a�Cutaneous�incision�below�costal�margin.�b�Insertion�of�Veress�needle�

F I g . � 5

Perpendicular�introduction�of�the�trocar

Page 60: Manual of laparoscopic urology

54 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

The optic is introduced through the trocar, and the ab-domen is then inspected for any injury due to insertion of the Veress needle or the trocar, and to identify adhe-sions in areas where the secondary ports will be placed.

T I P

After trocar placement and obturator removal, the trocar valve is briefly opened to check for egress of gas, confirming it is correctly placed inside the abdomen. The insufflator line is then connected to the trocar.

�Second�Port

For a right-side nephroureterectomy: 5 mm (mono-polar round-tipped scissors) For a left-side nephroureterectomy: 11 mm – po-sitioned around the umbilicus (monopolar round-tipped scissors, optic, 10-mm clip applier)

F I g . � 6

Triangulation�rule�for�right-side�nephroureterectomy

F I g . � 7

a�Triangulation�rule.�b�Ports�in�place

Page 61: Manual of laparoscopic urology

55Laparoscopic Assisted NephroureterectomyChapter 4

T I P

The position of the working trocars for a left-side nephroureterectomy are switched over when compared to the transperitoneal laparoscopic nephrectomy; therefore, the 5-mm port is placed at the xiphoid process, and the 11-mm port is placed close to the umbilicus (see Chap. 2, Access and Port Placement).

The triangulation rule must be followed for the place-ment of the trocars as the body habitus is different for each patient: four fingerbreadths between the optic trocar and the working trocars (Fig. 6), and five finger-breadths between the working trocars (Fig. 7a,b).

�Third�Port�

For a left-side nephroureterectomy: 5 mm positioned at the xiphoid process (bipolar grasper) For a right-side nephroureterectomy: 11 mm (bipo-lar grasper, optic)The triangulation rule must be followed as above.

�Fourth�Port�(5�mm,�suction�device)

For the introduction of the 5-mm trocar, a cutaneous incision is made approximately three fingers caudally to the umbilicus and in line with the periumbilical trocar (Fig. 8).

T I P

This trocar is positioned lower than for the transperitoneal laparoscopic nephrectomy; the trocar will be used for the placement of a bipolar grasper during the ureteral part of the procedure (Fig. 9).

�Fifth�Port�(5�mm,�liver�retractor�grasper)

If liver retraction is necessary during a right-side nephroureterectomy, a cutaneous incision is made ap-proximately two fingerbreadths below the level of the second port, and a 5-mm trocar is introduced.

The ports are finally tied to the skin with Vicryl® 2-0 to prevent accidental removal.

F I g . � 8

Fourth� port� (caudal� port)� in� line� with�the�periumbilical�port

Page 62: Manual of laparoscopic urology

56 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

�Access�for�the�Lower�Ureteral�Dissection�

During the ureteral part of the procedure, the posi-tion of the instruments is changed for the ureteral dissection. The optic is repositioned at the periumbili-cal port, the bipolar grasper at the caudal port, the mo-nopolar scissors at the initial optic port, and the suc-tion device at the xiphoid process port (Fig. 9).

T I P

The assistant moves to the right side of the sur-geon.

�Surgical�Technique�

�Colon�Mobilization

For a left-side nephroureterectomy, the plane between the descending colon and the underlying Gerota’s fas-cia is developed to allow the colon to fall medially (Fig. 10a–c).

T I P

The lateral attachments of Gerota’s fascia to the abdominal wall should not be freed at this time to avoid the kidney falling medially into the op-erating field.

F I g . � 9

Reposition�of�the�instruments��(see�Access�for�the�lower�ureteral�dissection)

Page 63: Manual of laparoscopic urology

57Laparoscopic Assisted NephroureterectomyChapter 4

F I g . � 1 0

a� Colon� attachments� to� abdominal� wall.� b� Release� of� the�colon�attachments�to�abdominal�wall.�c�Colon�is�dissected�from� Gerota’s� fascia� (Gerota� is� not� freed� from� abdominal�wall)

F I g . � 1 1

a�Spleen�is�released�from�kidney.�b�Spleen�dissected�en�bloc�

Page 64: Manual of laparoscopic urology

58 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

This plane of dissection is carried out cranially. The spl-enorenal and lienocolic ligaments are incised, allowing the spleen and the tail of the pancreas to be separated from the upper pole of the kidney. The en bloc dissection of the colon, spleen, and pancreas must be completed for adequate exposure of the renal vein (Fig. 11a,b).

For a right-side nephroureterectomy, the liver is crani-ally retracted using a grasper that is fixed to the abdomi-

nal wall. The ascending colon is mobilized and dissected from the underlying Gerota’s fascia. Colon mobilization continues caudally to the common iliac vessels.

�Ureter�and�gonadal�Vessels�Identification

Following the medial mobilization of the colon and me-socolon, the gonadal vessels are visualized. After the co-lon is medially retracted, the Gerota’s fatty tissue at the level of the lower pole of the kidney is incised and lifted to locate the psoas muscle (Fig. 12).

T I P

The correct maneuver to expose the psoas muscle is the continuous upper movement of the laparo-scopic instruments to lift the fatty tissue.

The psoas is followed to expose the ureter just lateral and deep to the gonadal vessels.

By tracking the cranial course of the ureter, the plane is followed up to the renal pedicle.

The ureter and gonadal vessels are not divided at this time. Both structures are lifted and, by visualization of the psoas muscle (Fig. 13a,b) together with the gonadal

F I g . � 1 2

Lifting�of�fatty�tissue�to�expose�psoas�muscle

F I g . � 1 3

a�Dissection�of�ureter�and�gonadal�vessels.�b�Psoas�muscle

Page 65: Manual of laparoscopic urology

59Laparoscopic Assisted NephroureterectomyChapter 4

vessels on the left side, followed cranially to the lower pole and hilum of the kidney (Fig. 14a,b).

The dissection of the right gonadal vein is not neces-sary, as it enters the vena cava on this side. Attachments

between the psoas muscle and Gerota’s fascia are re-leased with sharp and blunt dissection, and small ves-sels to the ureter and branches of the gonadal vein are coagulated with the bipolar grasper.

F I g . � 1 4

a�Psoas�is�followed�cranially�to�hilum.�b�Ureter�and�gonadal�vessels�approaching�renal�hilum�

F I g . � 1 5

a�Renal�hilum�exposed.�b�Individual�vessel�dissection�

Page 66: Manual of laparoscopic urology

60 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

�Exposure�and�Dissection�of�the�Renal�Hilum

On the left, tracking the course of the left gonadal vein into the renal vein and firm elevation of the lower pole of the kidney on both sides assists in the identification and blunt dissection of the renal hilum. The renal vessels should be dissected separately (Fig. 15a,b).

The renal vein is dissected, taking care with the lum-bar veins that drain posteriorly to the vessel. The left ad-renal vein is preserved if the ipsilateral adrenal gland is not removed (Fig. 16).

T I P

Dissection of the right renal vein is usually less demanding as the gonadal and lumbar veins are normally absent at this side.

The renal artery is exposed posterior to the renal vein and dissected (Fig. 17a,b).

�Renal�Hilum�Ligature�and�Transection

Hem-o-lok clips are applied to the artery.

T I P

One extra-large (XL) clip secures the renal ar-tery before the renal vein is clipped.

F I g . � 1 6�

Left�adrenal�vein�(A);�Left�renal�vein�(B);�Gonadal�vein�(C)

F I g . � 1 7

a�Renal�artery�posterior�to�renal�vein.�b�Dissection�of�the�renal�artery

Page 67: Manual of laparoscopic urology

61Laparoscopic Assisted NephroureterectomyChapter 4

Three clips (XL Hem-o-lok) are used on the renal vein, which is then carefully transected.

T I P

The renal vein should be flat after the renal ar-tery clip is placed; if the vein is still filling, an-other renal artery should be located.

Following division of the renal vein, clipping of the renal artery is completed (3 XL Hem-o-lok clips), and the ves-sel is then transected.

�Mobilization�of�the�Kidney��and�Adrenal�gland

Once all the hilar vessels have been divided, the dissec-tion continues posteriorly and superiorly to the upper pole. The attachments of the kidney to the posterior and lateral abdominal wall are released by blunt and sharp dissection, taking care to coagulate the bleeding vessels. The adrenal gland can be preserved in most cases. On the right, superior retraction of the liver facilitates the

dissection of the plane between the liver and the upper pole of the kidney (Fig. 18).

The ureteral dissection is continued distally as far as is technically feasible, and if an invasive ureteral lesion is suspected, the dissection should include a wide margin of surrounding tissue.

T I P

The instruments are repositioned (Fig. 9)

The ureter is double-clipped as low as possible with Liga-clip® II ML, and the remainder of the procedure can be completed through a lower ilioinguinal incision.

�Kidney�Extraction��and�Distal�Ureteral�Dissection

The position of the patient is maintained, and a Gib-son-type incision is made. The kidney, along with the proximal and midureter, is removed, and the renal bed is inspected for bleeding. The peritoneum is incised at the level of the iliac vessels, and the incision extends me-dial to the medial umbilical ligament to the pelvis. The vas deferens in male patients and the round ligament in female patients is double-clipped (Ligaclip II ML) and divided. The distal ureter, now lifted and placed on trac-tion, is dissected free between the bladder and the me-dian umbilical ligament down to its entrance into the bladder.

T I P

The bladder cuff is dissected extravesically, free-ing the ureter from the surrounding detrusor muscle.

A bladder cuff 2–3 cm surrounding the intramural ure-ter is delineated with the cautery, and the dissection of the intramural ureter extends into the bladder. The blad-der mucosa bordering the ureteral orifice is incised, and the specimen is removed. The bladder is closed in two planes using running Vicryl 2-0 for the inner mucosal layer and interrupted Vicryl 0 for the muscular layer.

F I g . � 1 8

Plane�between�kidney�and�liver

Page 68: Manual of laparoscopic urology

62 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

�Closure�of�the�Abdominal�Wall

The abdominal wall is closed using running Vicryl 2-0 SH 1 Plus (needle ½ 21.8 mm) for the peritoneum, Vic-ryl 0 suture in “X” for the muscle, and running Vicryl 1 CT Plus (needle ½ 39.9 mm) for the aponeurosis. Once the abdominal wall is closed, pneumoperitoneum is re-established, and the optic is introduced for revision of the hemostasis. A silicone Penrose drain is inserted. Af-ter evacuation of the pneumoperitoneum and removal of the trocars, the aponeurosis of the 11-mm ports is closed with a Dexon II HGU-46 suture. The skin inci-sions are closed with subcuticular Monocryl 3-0 C 423.

�Postoperative�Considerations

The nasogastric tube is removed at the end of the proce-dure, and the intravenous perfusion is stopped on day 1. Pain is controlled with scheduled intramuscular nonste-roidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs) and oral an-algesics. Intramuscular NSAIDs are often discontinued after 24 h. A light diet can generally be resumed on day 1 after surgery. The Foley catheter is removed on day 3 after surgery and the Penrose drain on the second post-

operative day. Patients leave the hospital on the third or fourth postoperative day and can resume normal light activities, but vigorous activities and heavy lifting are limited for at least one month after surgery.

�Suggested�Readings

Rouprêt M, Hupertan V: Oncologic control after open or laparoscopic nephroureterectomy for upper urinary tract transitional cell carcinoma: a single center experience. Urology 2007 Apr; 69(4):656–661.Busby JE, Matin SF: Laparoscopic radical nephroureterec-tomy for transitional cell carcinoma: where are we in 2007? Curr Opin Urol 2007 Mar; 17(2):83–87.Rassweiler JJ, Schulze M: Laparoscopic nephroureterectomy for upper urinary tract transitional cell carcinoma: is it bet-ter than open surgery? Eur Urol 2004 Dec; 46(6):690–697.Klingler HC, Lodde M: Modified laparoscopic nephroure-terectomy for treatment of upper urinary tract transitional cell cancer is not associated with an increased risk of tu-mour recurrence. Eur Urol 2003 Oct; 44(4):442–447.Gill IS, Sung GT: Laparoscopic radical nephroureterectomy for upper tract transitional cell carcinoma: the Cleveland Clinic experience. J Urol 2000 Nov; 164(5):1513–1522.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Page 69: Manual of laparoscopic urology

�Introduction�

Initially described as “extraperitoneal endoscopic radi-cal retropubic prostatectomy,” this novel approach for the treatment of prostate cancer avoids the potential dis-advantages of the transperitoneal route of dissection. As the peritoneal cavity is never entered, complications like small bowel injury, urine ascites, small bowel obstruc-tion, and intraperitoneal bleeding without the possibil-ity of tamponade are almost nonexistent. In addition, the occurrence of postoperative ileum is diminished. The extraperitoneal approach more closely reproduces the open retropubic radical prostatectomy technique, as the steps of the operation are almost identical. However, the pelvic and prostate anatomy is magnified during laparoscopy, making dissection of important structures much more precise. Although still considered a complex procedure, extraperitoneal laparoscopic radical prosta-tectomy is an evolving technique and has gained popu-larity in the last years. It is a safe procedure and, in ex-perienced hands, yields oncologic and functional results equivalent to the open approach.

�Preoperative�Preparation

Before a patient consents to a laparoscopic radical pros-tatectomy, it is important to discuss the specific risks of the surgery, including the potential need to convert to the traditional open operation if difficulties arise.

The patient is admitted to the hospital one day be-fore the surgery for bowel preparation, which includes 2 L of Colopeg® (1 envelope/L) p.o. and a Fleet® enema. Fasting starts at midnight before surgery. Thrombo-prophylaxis protocol is implemented with good hydra-

Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical Prostatectomy

Chapter 5

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . . 64 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . . 65 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

�First�Port�(11�mm,�optic�0°) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65�Second�Port�(5�mm,�bladder�retractor) . . . . . . . 66�Third�Port�(5�mm,�suction�device) . . . . . . . . . . . . 67�Fourth�Port�(11�mm,�bipolar�grasper) . . . . . . . . 70�Fifth�Port�(5�mm,�monopolar�round-tipped�scissors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Surgical Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73�Peritoneum�Displacement�and�Exposure�of�the�Bladder�Neck . . . . . . . . . . . 73�Bladder�Neck�Dissection�and�Division . . . . . . . 76�Dissection�of�the�Seminal�Vesicles�and�Exposure�of�Denonvilliers’�Fascia . . . . . . . . 76�Endopelvic�Fascia�and�Puboprostatic�Ligaments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78�Dorsal�Venous�Complex�of�the�Penis�(DVC) . . 79�Identification�and�Preservation�of�the�Neurovascular�Bundle� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80�The�Prostatic�Pedicles� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82�Division�of�the�Dorsal�Vein�Complex�and�Urethra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85�Bladder�Neck�Reconstruction�and�Anastomosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Page 70: Manual of laparoscopic urology

64 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

tion, placement of compressive elastic stockings on the lower extremities, and low-molecular-weight heparin. Enoxaparin (Clexane®, Lovenox®) 40 mg sc 1 × day or (Flaxiparine®, Fraxiparin®) 0.6 mL sc 1 × day is initi-ated on day 1 after the surgery and continued daily until the patient is discharged from the hospital. In selected cases, the treatment is continued for 30 days after the procedure.

T I P

Thromboprophylaxis is important due to the concurrent risk factors of laparoscopy, cancer, and pelvic surgery.

Patients also receive antibiotic prophylaxis with a single preoperative dose of intravenous second-generation cephalosporin, unless they are allergic to penicillin. Blood type and crossmatch are determined.

�Patient�Positioning�and�Initial�Preparation

The surgery is performed under general anesthesia. The base of the table must be positioned below the patient’s

hip to avoid elevation of the abdomen while in the Tren-delenburg position (Fig. 1).

The patient is placed in the supine position with the lower limbs in abduction, allowing the laparoscopic cart to be moved closer to the surgeon and intraoperative ac-cess to the perineum (Fig. 2).

The lower buttocks must be placed at the distal end of the operating table. The upper limbs are positioned alongside the body to avoid the risk of stretch injuries to the brachial plexus and to allow for free movements of the operative team. Shoulder support is placed over the acromium clavicular joint (Fig. 3) for the Trendelenburg position.

A nasogastric tube is placed by the anesthesiologist and the stomach decompressed to avoid puncture dur-ing trocar placement and to allow additional space dur-ing extraperitoneal insufflation. The abdomen, pelvis, and genitalia are skin prepared in case conversion to an open procedure is required. An 18Fr Foley catheter with 10 mL in the balloon is introduced after the place-ment of the sterile drapes. The surgeon and the second assistant operate from the patient’s left side, and the first assistant is placed at the opposite side of the surgeon. The laparoscopic cart is placed at the patient’s feet, while the instruments table and the coagulation unit are posi-tioned at the left side of the patient (Fig. 4).

F I g . � 1

Patient�position�

F I g . � 2

Position�of�the�legs

Page 71: Manual of laparoscopic urology

65Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 5

�Trocars�and�Laparoscopic�Instruments�

2 × 11 mm (optic 0° and bipolar grasper) 3 × 5 mm (scissors, suction device, and palpator) Monopolar round-tipped scissors, bipolar grasper, dissector, 5-mm suction device, needle drivers (2), and 10-mm laparoscopic optic 0° (Fig. 5)

�Access�and�Port�Placement�

See Figures 6 and 7.

�First�Port�(11�mm,�optic�0°)

A cutaneous incision is made at the inferior and right margin of the umbilicus (Fig. 8).

T I P

The trocar is placed in the midline to facilitate access to the right epigastric vessels in case in-jury to these vessels occurs during insertion of the fifth trocar.

•••

F I g . � 3

Shoulder�support

F I g . � 4

Laparoscopic�cart�at�patient’s�feet

F I g . � 5

Instruments�table

Page 72: Manual of laparoscopic urology

66 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

In patients with an enlarged umbilicus, where the linea alba is usually wider, the cutaneous incision should be placed more laterally, facilitating access to the right rec-tus abdominis muscle.

The subcutaneous fatty tissue is dissected with blunt scissors, resulting in visualization of the superficial fas-cia (rectus sheath). The fascia is grasped by two Kocher clamps and incised (Fig. 9a,b).

The right rectus abdominis muscle is dissected later-ally, and a purse-string suture of Polysorb 0 UL 877 (nee-dle 5/8) is placed through the superficial fascia to avoid air leakage during the procedure and to facilitate closure of the aponeurosis after the removal of the trocar.

The optic is placed inside the 11-mm trocar before insertion into the abdomen (Fig. 10). The optic and the trocar are then introduced through the skin incision at an angle of 30° (Fig. 11), following the plane above the

semicircular line of Douglas (Fig. 12) and in the direc-tion of the prostate.

T I P

The purse-string suture is “falsely” tied around the trocar by placing a Kocher clamp that blocks both threads at the level of the fascia.

�Second�Port�(5�mm,�bladder�retractor)

Following visual confirmation that the peritoneum is not opened, the insufflation line is connected, and the pres-sure of insufflation is switched to maximum flow. With

F I g . � 6

Access�and�port�placement�(This�figure�was�published�in�Wein:�Campbell-Walsh�Urology,�9th�ed.,�Copyright�Elsevier)

Page 73: Manual of laparoscopic urology

67Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 5

gentle up and down and lateral movements on the optic associated with the injected CO₂ gas, the preperitoneal space between the two epigastric vessels and the pubic arch is developed. A skin incision is made in the lower abdomen, two fingerbreadths above the pubis slightly to the left of the midline.

T I P

The incision is made 50% larger than the diam-eter of the 5-mm trocar; it is placed slightly to the left to avoid conflict between the optic and this port.

A 5-mm trocar is introduced (Fig. 13).

�Third�Port�(5�mm,�suction�device)

The bipolar grasper is introduced through the 5-mm second port, with the tip directed toward the right an-terior superior iliac spine. The Bogros space is then dis-sected. The dissection should start in the angle between the epigastric vessels and the peritoneal reflection at the level of the deep inguinal ring (Fig. 14a–c).

F I g . � 7

Trocars�in�place

F I g . � 8

Cutaneous�incision�to�the�right�of�midline

Page 74: Manual of laparoscopic urology

68 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

F I g . � 1 0

Optic�inside�trocar

F I g . � 1 1

Angle�of�trocar�introduction

F I g . � 9

a Superficial�aponeurosis.�b Aponeurosis�incision

Page 75: Manual of laparoscopic urology

69Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 5

F I g . � 1 3

Second�trocar�position

F I g . � 1 2

Trocar� follows� the� plane� above� the� semicircular� line� of�Douglas

F I g . � 1 4

Fig.� 14� a� Epigastric� vessels� (A);� Closed� Bogros� space� (B).�b� Developing� the� dissection� plane.� c Peritoneal� reflection�(A);�Open�Bogros�space�(B)

Page 76: Manual of laparoscopic urology

70 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

T I P

The Bogros space is situated laterally and cra-nially to the Retzius space, corresponding to the retroinguinal preperitoneum. Anteriorly, it is limited by the deep layer of transversalis fascia enveloping the epigastric vessels. Medially, it is limited by the adherent zone of umbilico vesi-cal fascia, transversalis fascia, and peritoneum, situated just behind the epigastrics. The lateral limits are the pelvic wall and the iliacus muscle. The psoas muscle corresponds to the inferior limit. The key point to visualize the Bogros space is the dissection of the epigastric vessels, which are superficial to the deep layer of transversalis fascia and in close relation to the peritoneum. If one penetrates the plane superficial to the deep layer of transversalis fascia, the bare epigastrics will be exposed, and the risk of bleeding increases by trauma to the small branching vessels—this is the wrong plane of dissection. By gently brushing the tissue away from the epigastric arcade, the right plane of dissection is usually easily visual-ized. The dissection follows a sagittal direction (the same direction as the fascia and the epi-gastrics), and the dissector gently separates the avascular plane that separates the peritoneum from the deep layer of transversalis fascia.

The epigastric vessels are elevated by the bipolar; ini-tially the instrument is pushed in and then pushed cra-nially toward the direction of the right anterior superior iliac spine. The bipolar is replaced by the optic, and the same maneuver of sagittal dissection is done to open the space for the introduction of the trocar. The grasper is then placed under the epigastric vessels. The tip is ad-vanced laterally to the vessels, and the grasper is lifted. Holding this position, a skin incision is made from the tip of the bipolar toward the direction of the right an-terior superior iliac spine, and a 5-mm trocar is placed (Fig. 15a–f).

T I P

The trocar must be introduced in the same di-rection and inferior to the bipolar. Using this upward maneuver on the grasper, the epigastric vessels are protected from injury during trocar insertion.

�Fourth�Port�(11�mm,�bipolar�grasper)

The surgeon switches to the right side of the patient. The bipolar grasper is introduced through the right anterior superior iliac spine port, and the laparoscopic dissec-tor is introduced through the lower abdomen port. The Bogros plane on the left side of the patient is dissected. Both instruments must be moved in the opposite up and down direction for the development of the correct plane of dissection. Then, the epigastric vessels are elevated by the dissector, and the bipolar grasper executes the same cephalad movement toward the direction of the left an-terior superior iliac spine. The optic is introduced at this site and moved cranially toward the anterior left iliac spine to liberate the space for the introduction of the trocar. The grasper is then placed under the epigastric vessels. The tip is advanced laterally to the vessels, and the grasper is lifted. Holding this position, a cutaneous incision is made from the tip of the bipolar toward the direction of the left anterior superior iliac spine, and an 11-mm trocar is introduced (Fig. 16a–d).

T I P

The epigastric vessels must be lifted by the bipo-lar, and the trocar must be placed in the same direction and inferior to the bipolar.

D F I g . � 1 5

a�Right�anterior�iliac�crest.�b� Internal�view:�Epigastric�vessels�(A);�Bogros�space�(B).�c�Angle�of�trocar�introduction.�d�Trocar�pro-truding�muscle.�e�Horizontal�angle�of�trocar�introduction.�f�Trocar�through�the�muscle

Page 77: Manual of laparoscopic urology

71Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 5

Page 78: Manual of laparoscopic urology

72 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

�Fifth�Port�(5�mm,��monopolar�round-tipped�scissors)

For the introduction of the last 5-mm trocar, a skin in-cision is made at a point situated at the junction of the lateral 2/3 and medial 1/3 distance between the right anterior superior iliac spine trocar and the umbilicus trocar (Fig. 17a,b).

T I P

Pay attention to the epigastric vessels, which can be visualized by pressing the right lateral side of the abdomen).

F I g . � 1 6

a�Right�anterior�superior�iliac�spine.�b�Muscle�exposition.�c�Angle�of�trocar�introduction.�d�Trocar�through�the�muscle

Page 79: Manual of laparoscopic urology

73Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 5

T I P

If the peritoneum is opened during trocar intro-duction, it should be left open to permit the free flow of CO₂ gas between the extraperitoneal and intraperitoneal space. The only time when the peritoneum can be closed is while inserting the first trocar, at the level of the umbilicus, when gas is not yet inflated.

The operating table is moved down and backward, and the patient is placed in a slight Trendelenburg position. Steps are placed for the surgeon, and the bi-polar and monopolar pedals are placed over the step (Fig. 18a,b).

T I P

Steps are used to reduce conflict between the arms of the surgeon and first assistant.

�Surgical�Technique

�Peritoneum�Displacement�and�Exposure�of�the�Bladder�Neck

The peritoneum is cranially mobilized to increase the extraperitoneal space. The fibroareolar and fatty tissue

F I g . � 1 7

a�Fifth�port.�b�Ports�in�place

Page 80: Manual of laparoscopic urology

74 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

layers between the superolateral aspect of the blad-der and the medial aspect of the external iliac vein are bilaterally released. This maneuver, along with reduc-tion of any visible pelvic wall hernia, allows for further peritoneum displacement.

T I P

Every effort should be made to thoroughly coag-ulate the bleeding vessels during this dissection to avoid image decay throughout the procedure.

The fatty tissue around the prostate is freed, starting lat-erally from the reflection of the endopelvic wall toward the midline on both sides (Fig. 19).

T I P

A little traction on the tissue opens the right plane, and it is easier to start the dissection at the endopelvic fascia.

The fibroareolar and fatty tissue attached at the level of the Santorini plexus and over the anterior surface of the prostate are pulled down toward the bladder neck with gentle but firm traction with the bipolar grasper. The superficial branch of the deep dorsal vein com-plex is coagulated with the bipolar grasper and cut with the cold scissors (Fig. 20).

F I g . � 1 8

a�Steps�under�the�surgeon.�b�Position�of�the�operative�team

Page 81: Manual of laparoscopic urology

75Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 5

T I P

The superficial branch is transected at a safe distance from the pubic bone to prevent retrac-tion of the vein and to permit easy vessel control in case of bleeding.

The fatty tissue downward traction maneuver continues until resistance is encountered, signaling the approach of the bladder neck. The dissected fatty tissue is then lifted and divided in the midline to facilitate the co-agulation and transection of the vessels that overlie the bladder neck. The removal of this fatty tissue facilitates visualization and dissection of the bladder neck, which is usually located under the crossing of the fibers of the puboprostatic ligaments (Fig. 21).

T I P

The superficial branch of the deep dorsal vein travels between the puboprostatic ligaments and is the centrally located vein overlying the blad-der neck and prostate. It has communicating branches over the bladder itself and into the en-dopelvic fascia, so it is important to coagulate the vessels over the bladder neck when removing the fatty tissue at this level.

F I g . � 1 9

Fatty�tissue�covering�the�prostate

F I g . � 2 0

Superficial�veins�of�the�Santorini�plexus�(A)

F I g . � 2 1

Anterior�prostatic�surface�free�of�fatty�tissue

Page 82: Manual of laparoscopic urology

76 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

�Bladder�Neck�Dissection�and�Division

The bladder neck is situated under the crossing of the fibers of the puboprostatic ligaments (Fig. 22).

A transversal incision with the monopolar scissors along with forceful counter pressure with the bipolar grasper, which is placed over the bladder, opens the su-perficial layer and exposes the correct plane of dissec-tion (Fig. 23).

The incision progresses to assume an inverted U-shape to avoid dissecting through the lateral sides of the prostate. At the medial portion of the dissection, the longitudinal muscle fibers of the anterior urethral wall are exposed (Fig. 24). The urethra is dissected at its ante-rior and lateral aspect and then transversally transected close to the bladder neck to avoid perioperative urinary retention.

The Foley catheter is removed, and a metal 45 Fr bou-gie is introduced to facilitate elevation of the prostate. The dissection of the posterior plane between the blad-der neck and the prostate is initiated with a U-shaped incision on the posterior urethral wall. To dissect the right lateral side of the bladder neck, the bipolar grasper with the jaws in the “closed” position is introduced into the bladder. The monopolar scissors, placed at the ex-

ternal lateral side of the bladder, touch the tip of the grasper to confirm the limits of the lateral dissection. The lateral side of the bladder is dissected, and by apply-ing downward tension on the grasper that now holds the anterolateral bladder wall, the correct plane between the posterior bladder neck and the prostate is developed.

T I P

Care must be taken not to perforate the bladder at this level as the ureteral orifices are in close proximity.

The dissection is carried out from the lateral side to the center and continues to the other side to fully separate the bladder neck from the base of the prostate (Fig. 25).

�Dissection�of�the�Seminal�Vesicles�and�Exposure�of�Denonvilliers’�Fascia

The plane of longitudinal muscle fibers behind the blad-der neck (Bell’s muscle layer) is transversally incised to expose the vas deferens. A probe can be inserted via the

F I g . � 2 2

Bladder�neck�(A)�at�the�crossing�of�the�fibers�of�the�pubo-prostatic�ligaments;�Puboprostatic�ligaments�(B)

F I g . � 2 3

Bladder�neck�(A)�dissection

Page 83: Manual of laparoscopic urology

7 7Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 5

suprapubic port to aid in retraction of the bladder. The vas is grasped and pulled up and laterally to expose its medial side. With a sweeping movement with the mo-nopolar scissors, the plane between the medial side of the seminal vesicle and the Denonvilliers’ fascia is re-leased (Fig. 26).

The vas is dissected inferiorly and cut with cold scis-sors at its lower point.

T I P

With the bipolar, coagulate the vas deferens vas-cular pedicle, which is situated behind the vas; after cutting this pedicle, the seminal vesicle is always exposed.

The seminal vesicle is grasped and pulled toward the op-tic to facilitate exposure. The lateral pedicle of the semi-nal vesicle is dissected and coagulated, and following the inferior pedicle dissection and coagulation, the seminal vesicle tip is then freed. The same dissection is made on the left vas and seminal vesicle. Both structures are then grasped and lifted to facilitate dissection of the posterior plane of the prostate from the Denonvilliers’ fascia. This

fascia is bluntly incised, and with downward pressure of the suction device placed at the incision, the posterior surface of the prostate is released.

There are three planes of dissection at this level (Fig. 27):

A. A plane that extends into the prostate (the wrong plane of dissection!)

F I g . � 2 4

Anterior�urethral�wall�(A)

F I g . � 2 5

Opened�bladder�neck�with�Foley�catheter

F I g . � 2 6

Dissection�of�medial�side�of�seminal�vesicle� (A);�Denonvil-liers’�fascia�(B)

Page 84: Manual of laparoscopic urology

78 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

B. A plane between the Denonvilliers’ fascia and the prostate, which is the plane developed for neurovas-cular bundle preservation C. A posterior plane between the rectum and the De-nonvilliers’ fascia—developed in cases of wide exci-sion of the prostate without neurovascular bundle preservation

�Endopelvic�Fascia��and�Puboprostatic�Ligaments

The two layers of the endopelvic fascia are separated using gentle and forceful lateral traction and counter-traction at the level of the bladder neck (Fig. 28). The fi-bers should not be divided close to the prostate to avoid lacerating the large veins that cross lateroposterior to the prostate. As the two layers of endopelvic fascia be-come more adherent moving toward the apex, they are then incised with the monopolar scissors to open the plane between the prostate and the endopelvic fascia (Fig. 29a,b).

The dissection continues upward to liberate the peri-urethral muscle from the prostatic apex.

T I P

The muscle is bluntly separated from the lateral side of the apex with cold scissors and laterally displaced to the pelvic wall to facilitate the dor-sal venous complex ligature.

The puboprostatic ligament is cut close to the pubic bone, and the vessels are carefully dissected to expose the plane between the pubic bone and the dorsal venous complex of the penis.

T I P

If bleeding occurs at this stage, the prostate is lifted with the metal bougie and pressed against the pubic bone.

F I g . � 2 7

Three� posterior� planes� of� prostate� dissection� (see� text�above):�(A),�(B),�and�(C)�

F I g . � 2 8

Right�endopelvic�fascia�

Page 85: Manual of laparoscopic urology

79Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 5

The same dissection is done at the other side, and the dorsal venous complex is ready to be ligated (Fig. 30).

�Dorsal�Venous�Complex�of�the�Penis�(DVC)

The dorsal vein complex at the apex of the prostate is ligated with Polysorb 0 CL 802 (needle ½ 40 mm) but not immediately cut. The needle is passed from right to left in the avascular plane between the urethra and the dorsal vein complex.

T I P

The needle in the needle driver is positioned with the tip facing down to the left and with an angle of 90°.

The needle is loaded on the tissue and elevated. Then it is advanced to the other side and finally turned to be

exited at the same entrance point level on the counterla-teral side (Fig. 31a,b).

T I P

The common trunk of the Santorini deep venous plexus and lateral venous plexuses are covered and concealed by the prostatic and endopelvic fascia. The lateral venous plexuses course pos-terolaterally and communicate freely with the pudendal, obturator, and vesical plexuses. Near the puboprostatic ligaments, small branches from the lateral plexus often penetrate the pelvic sidewall musculature and communicate with the internal pudendal vein. The lateral plexus inter-connects with other venous systems to form the inferior vesical vein, which empties into the in-ternal iliac vein. With the complex of veins and plexuses anastomosing freely, any laceration of these rather friable structures can lead to con-siderable blood loss.

F I g . � 2 9

a�Endopelvic�fascia�layers�divided.�b�Incision�with�monopolar�scissors

Page 86: Manual of laparoscopic urology

80 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

�Identification�and�Preservation�of�the�Neurovascular�Bundle�

The neurovascular bundles are dissected and preserved, depending on anatomic and oncologic conditions. The posterolateral surface of the prostate is exposed by roll-ing it sideways, and sometimes the metal bougie must be removed to facilitate this maneuver. The fascial lay-

ers are incised with cold scissors, and the neurovascu-lar bundle is gently separated from the prostate, taking care not to disrupt the prostatic capsule. The dissection is carried out in an “antegrade” or “descending” manner bilaterally, and the use of coagulation is prohibited to avoid damage to the neurovascular bundle (Fig. 32).

T I P

As the neurovascular bundle usually runs at a minimal distance from the prostate at the level of the apex, the dissection of the bundle is easier at this level.

The suction device should be positioned at a level inferior to the dissection to aspirate the blood off the operat-ing field.

T I P

The maneuver to dissect the neurovascular bun-dle at the right side is medial displacement of the posterolateral side of the prostate with the aid of the grasper and dissection with the monopolar scissors; for the left side, both instruments are used alternately.

F I g . � 3 0

Dorsal�venous�complex�of�the�penis

F I g . � 3 1

a�Dorsal�vein�complex�ligation�(A).�b�Angle�of�needle�introduction�(90°)

Page 87: Manual of laparoscopic urology

81Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 5

F I g . � 3 2�

Left�neurovascular�bundle�(A);�Prostate�(B)�

F I g . � 3 3

a�Right�prostatic�pedicle�suturing.�b�Left�prostatic�pedicle�suturing.�c�Prostatic�pedicle�–�vessel�ligation

Page 88: Manual of laparoscopic urology

82 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

�The�Prostatic�Pedicles�

There are several techniques to approach the prostatic pedicles, and they should be individualized for each pa-tient. The prostate is lifted with the metal bougie to put the pedicles under tension. The pedicle is controlled at a safe distance from the neurovascular bundle and high on the base of the prostate. It is cut with cold mono-polar scissors close to the prostate, and coagulation of bleeding vessels should be avoided at all times if potency preservation is being considered.

�Technique�1�

Passing a Vicryl 0 at the base of the prostatic pedicle (superficial to the neurovascular bundle), and tying the knot but not cutting the needle. The pedicle is cut with cold scissors and at the same time the pedicle vessels are carefully dissected and tied with the suture already in place. In this technique, the dissection of the neurovas-cular bundle begins from the posterolateral side of the prostate, and is done after the section of the vascular pedicle. (Fig. 33a–c).

F I g . � 3 4

a�Dissector�under�right�prostatic�pedicle.�b�Thread�placed�at�the�tip�of�the�dissector.�c Thread�encompasses�right�prostatic�pedicle

Page 89: Manual of laparoscopic urology

83Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 5

T I P

Two rounds of suture should be passed at every stage, and too much space should not be left in between the running suture to avoid tearing the tissue while performing the final knot.

�Technique�2

This technique involves passing a dissector underneath the pedicle close to the prostate, at right angles to its axis, and placing a simple suture of Vicryl® 0 at the tip of the clamp to be tied intracorporally. This suture should not encompass the neurovascular bundle that runs par-allel to the prostatic pedicle (Fig. 34a–c). To pass the dis-sector through the left pedicle, the dissector is inserted through the right iliac spine port, and the suction device is placed through the paraumbilical port.

F I g . � 3 5

a� Neurovascular� bundle� (NVB);� Prostatic� pedicle� vessel�(V).� b� Neurovascular� bundle� dissected� with� cold� scissors.�c�Neurovascular�bundle�displaced�laterally�

Page 90: Manual of laparoscopic urology

84 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

�Technique�3

In the third technique, the pedicle is cut with cold scis-sors and, at the same time, the vessels are dissected and clipped with small size (5 mm) Hem-o-lok clips, taking care not to compromise the prostatic margins. In this technique, the dissection of the neurovascular bundle begins from the posterolateral side of the pros-tate and is done after the section of the vascular pedicle (Fig. 35a–c).

�Technique�4

The final technique involves placing bilateral atraumatic vascular bulldog clamps (with long arms), which are in-troduced with the aid of a laparoscopic bulldog clamp applier. They are placed in a proximal position at the prostatic pedicle, approximately 1 cm from the prostate. After transecting the vascular pedicle, either a suture or fibrin sealant can be used to control the bleeding follow-ing removal of the vascular clamps (Fig. 36).

T I P

The Denonvilliers’ fascia must be longitudinally incised on both sides of the rectum for the cor-rect placement of the long arms’ bulldog clamp.

T I P

When bleeding occurs after the prostatic pedicle is transected, a running suture of Vicryl® 2-0 SH Plus is superficially placed at the internal side of the Denonvilliers’ fascia, endopelvic fascia, and the vascular pedicle to control the bleeding vessel. Beginning at the internal side of Denon-villiers’ fascia, the needle is passed from a cra-nial to a caudal direction; then at the endopelvic fascia, the needle is passed from a caudal to a cranial direction. The last suture is placed at the proximal prostatic pedicle; the needle is intro-duced from the lateral to the medial side, and the knot is then tied.

F I g . � 3 6

Bulldog�clamp�at�the�pedicle

F I g . � 3 7

Dorsal�vein�complex�division

Page 91: Manual of laparoscopic urology

85Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 5

After the pedicles are incised, the metal bougie is pulled back from the urethra to facilitate elevation of the pros-tate. The posterior attachments to the Denonvilliers’ fascia and the posterolateral attachments to the neuro-vascular bundle are released up to the apex with blunt and sharp dissection. The gland is now only connected to the deep venous complex and the urethra.

�Division�of�the�Dorsal�Vein�Complex�and�Urethra

By applying downward pressure on the metal bougie, the anterior surface of the prostate is exposed. The dor-sal vein complex is divided at the apex with cold scis-sors, and the initial incisions are tangential to the pros-tate to avoid inadvertent entry into the gland (Fig. 37). By moving the metal bougie sideways, the urethra is dissected at its lateral sides until the prostatourethral junction is visualized. The metal bougie is retracted to allow the transection of the urethra as close to the apex as possible (Fig. 38).

T I P

Following the transection of the anterior wall of the urethra, the metal bougie is lifted to expose the posterior wall.

The prostate is released, and the operative site is care-fully inspected for bleeding (Fig. 39). A small endobag (EndoCatch®) is introduced through the left 11-mm port, and the prostate is inserted into it. The bag with the specimen is left inside to be removed at the end of the procedure (Fig. 40).

T I P

A retractor is introduced through the 11-mm left iliac spine port, and the port is partially re-moved over it. The string of the bag is exterior-ized through the outer surface of the port, and the port is replaced over the retractor. The bag is then pulled out and partially exteriorized, fixing the prostate away from the operative field.

F I g . � 3 8

Prostatourethral�junction�divided�

F I g . � 3 9

Prostate�released�

Page 92: Manual of laparoscopic urology

86 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

�Bladder�Neck�Reconstruction�and�Anastomosis

When the bladder neck needs to be reconstructed, a posterior running suture of Vicryl 2-0 is used to ap-proximate full-thickness muscularis and mucosa, form-ing a tennis racket closure. It is important to visualize the position of the ureteral orifices before the closure is initiated to avoid inadvertent passage of the suture through the ureter. The bladder neck is narrowed to ap-proximate the diameter of the urethra. The anastomosis between the bladder neck and the urethra is performed by interrupted sutures of Polysorb 2-0 GL 123 (needle ½ 26 mm). The lateral movements of the metal bougie inserted at the urethra aid in the passage of the needle. Beginning at the posterior bladder neck, a U-shaped suture is placed from the inside–outside at the bladder level; from the outside–inside of the lumen of the ure-thra; from the inside–outside of the lumen of the ure-thra; and finally from the outside–inside of the lumen of the bladder. The double-looped knot, placed inside the bladder neck, is spontaneously self-blocked due to the tension applied to the threads, allowing the bladder and urethra to be approached together (Fig. 41a–f).

T I P

If tension is encountered at this step, the insuf-flator pressure and the Trendelenburg position are reduced to facilitate the anastomosis.

The metal bougie is placed inside the bladder, guiding the passage of the needle for the following sutures.

Two sets of lateral sutures alternating at the 5, 7, 2, and 10 o’clock positions (Figs. 42a,b and 43) and a U-shaped suture at the 12 o’clock position with the knot on the outside are introduced (Fig. 44a–d). This U-shaped suture can also be used to close the bladder neck anteriorly, if necessary. Traction should be avoided at all times while passing the sutures to prevent tearing of the urethral wall.

T I P

The right posterior sutures are done with the right hand, and the left posterior sutures are done with the left hand. For the anterior sutures, the instrument is crossed in the midline. The po-sition of the needle on the needle holder is 2/3 posterior at a 45º angle for the posterior and an-terior sutures and at a 90° angle for the lateral sutures.

A silicone 18 Fr Foley catheter is introduced through a guide after the anastomosis is completely performed to avoid puncture of the catheter.

T I P

The guide with the catheter should be laterally moved inside the bladder to confirm it is in the correct intravesical position.

The balloon is filled with 10 mL of saline, and the in-tegrity of the anastomosis is demonstrated by filling the bladder with 200 mL of irrigation fluid.

The prostate is removed by enlarging the left iliac spine port site.

F I g . � 4 0

Prostate�inserted�into�endobag

Page 93: Manual of laparoscopic urology

87Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 5

F I g . � 4 1

Posterior� vesicourethral� suture� sequence:� a� Initial� suture� at� bladder� neck.� b� Suture� at� posterior� right� side� of� urethra.� c� Suture�exiting�urethral�lumen,�right�side.�d�Suture�entering�urethral�lumen,�left�posterior�side�of�urethra.�e�Final�suture�at�bladder�neck.�f�Bladder�neck�approaching�urethra

Page 94: Manual of laparoscopic urology

88 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

T I P

To enlarge the incision for the passage of the bag containing the prostate, the skin is cut at its me-dial end, and the fascia is cut at the lateral end to avoid injuring the epigastric vessels.

A Penrose drain is positioned close to the anastomosis and exited through the right iliac spine port site. The aponeurosis of the 11-mm port is closed with Polysorb 0 sutures, and the skin is closed with running intradermic Monocryl 3-0.

�Postoperative�Considerations

The nasogastric tube is removed at the end of the pro-cedure. The patient is given appropriate analgesia as per protocol, including intravenous paracetamol during the first 24 h and major analgesics as necessary. The intra-venous perfusion is stopped on day 1 after surgery, oral fluids are started the morning after surgery, and a light diet can generally be resumed on day 2. The suprapubic drain is usually removed after 48–72 h or after secre-tions are below 50 mL. The bladder catheter is removed on day 5 after surgery if urine is clear, but in case of per-sistent residual haematuria, a cystogram is performed. Normal activity is resumed four weeks after surgery.

F I g . � 4 2

Right�lateral�vesicourethral�suture�sequence:�a�Suture�entering�lateral�bladder�side.�b�Suture�entering�lateral�urethral�lumen�

F I g . � 4 3

Left�lateral�vesicourethral�suture

Page 95: Manual of laparoscopic urology

89Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 5

Erdogru T, Teber D: Comparison of transperitoneal and extraperitoneal laparoscopic radical prostatectomy using match-pair analysis. Eur Urol 2004 Sep; 46(3):312–319; dis-cussion 320.Ruiz L, Salomon L: Comparison of early oncologic results of laparoscopic radical prostatectomy by extraperito-neal versus transperitoneal approach. Eur Urol 2004 Jul; 46(1):50–54; discussion 54–56.Bollens R, Vanden Bossche M: Extraperitoneal laparoscopic radical prostatectomy. Results after 50 cases. Eur Urol 2001 Jul; 40(1):65–69.Raboy A, Albert P: Early experience with extraperitoneal endoscopic radical retropubic prostatectomy. Surg Endosc 1998 Oct; 12(10):1264–1267.

4.

5.

6.

7.

�Suggested�Readings

Levinson AW, Su LM: Laparoscopic radical prostatectomy: current techniques. Curr Opin Urol 2007 Mar; 17(2):98–103.Stolzenburg JU, Rabenalt R: Endoscopic extraperitoneal radical prostatectomy: oncological and functional results after 700 procedures. J Urol 2005 Oct; 174(4 Pt 1):1271–1275; discussion 1275.Gill IS, Ukimura O: Lateral pedicle control during laparo-scopic radical prostatectomy: refined technique. Urology 2005 Jan; 65(1):23–27.

1.

2.

3.

F I g . � 4 4

Anterior�vesicourethral�suture�sequence:�a�Initial�suture�at�anterior�bladder�side.�b�Suture�exiting�at�anterior�urethral�side.�c�Su-ture�entering�urethral�anterior�side.�d�Final�knot

Page 96: Manual of laparoscopic urology

�Introduction

Laparoscopic radical prostatectomy has become an es-tablished treatment for organ-confined prostate cancer and is increasingly performed at selected centers world-wide. The potential advantages of the transperitoneal laparoscopic radical prostatectomy compared to the extraperitoneal approach are a greater working space and reduced tension on the urethrovesical anastomosis. Furthermore, when performing extended pelvic lymph-adenectomy for high-risk prostate cancer patients, the transperitoneal technique is technically less demanding than the extraperitoneal approach.

�Preoperative�Preparation

Before a patient consents to a laparoscopic radical pros-tatectomy, it is important to discuss the specific risks of the surgery, including the potential need to convert to the traditional open operation if difficulties arise.

The patient is admitted to the hospital one day before the surgery for bowel preparation, which includes 2 L of Colopeg® (1 envelope/L) p.o. and a Fleet® enema). Fast-ing starts at midnight before surgery. Thromboprophy-laxis is implemented with good hydration, placement of compressive elastic stockings on the lower extremi-ties, and low-molecular-weight heparin. Enoxaparin (Clexane®, Lovenox®) 40 mg sc 1 × day or nadroparin (Flaxiparine®, Fraxiparin®) 0.6 mL sc 1 × day is initi-ated on day 1 after the surgery and continued daily until the patient is discharged from the hospital. In selected

Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical Prostatectomy

Chapter 6

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . 92 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . 93 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

�Veress�Needle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93�First�Port�(11�mm,�optic�0°) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94�Second�Port�(11�mm,�bipolar�grasper) . . . . . . 94�Third�Port�(5�mm,�suction�device) . . . . . . . . . . . 95�Fourth�Port�(5�mm,�monopolar�round-tipped�scissors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95�Fifth�Port�(5�mm,�palpator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Surgical Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95�Bowel�Displacement� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95�Pelvic�Lymphadenectomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96�Douglas�Pouch�Incision�and�Dissection�of�the�Seminal�Vesicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97�Anterior�Dissection—Retzius�Space . . . . . . . . 98�Peritoneum�Displacement�and�Exposure�of�the�Bladder�Neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99�Bladder�Neck�Dissection�and�Division . . . . . . 100�Dissection�of�the�Seminal�Vesicles�and�Exposure�of�Denonvilliers’�Fascia . . . . . . . 101�Endopelvic�Fascia�and�Puboprostatic�Ligaments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102�Dorsal�Venous�Complex�of�the�Penis�(DVC) 104�Identification�and�Preservation�of�the�Neurovascular�Bundle� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104�The�Prostatic�Pedicles� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105�Division�of�the�Dorsal�Vein�Complex�and�Urethra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108�Bladder�Neck�Reconstruction�and�Urethrovesical�Anastomosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Page 97: Manual of laparoscopic urology

92 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

cases, the treatment is continued for 30 days after the procedure.

T I P

Thromboprophylaxis is justified due to the con-current risk factors of laparoscopy, cancer, and pelvic surgery.

Patients also receive antibiotic prophylaxis with a single preoperative dose of intravenous second-generation cephalosporin, unless they are allergic to penicillin. Blood type and crossmatch are determined.

�Patient�Positioning�and�Initial�Preparation

The surgery is performed under general anesthesia. The base of the table must be positioned below the patient’s hip to avoid elevation of the abdomen while in the Tren-delenburg position (Fig. 1).

The patient is placed in the supine position with the lower limbs in abduction, allowing the laparoscopic cart to be moved closer to the surgeon and intraoperative ac-cess to the perineum (Fig. 2).

The lower buttocks must be placed at the distal end of the operating table. The upper limbs are positioned alongside the body to avoid the risk of stretch injuries to the brachial plexus and to allow for free movements of the operative team. Shoulder support is placed over the acromium clavicular joint (Fig. 3) for the Trendelenburg position.

A nasogastric tube is placed by the anesthesiologist and the stomach decompressed to avoid puncture dur-ing trocar placement. The abdomen, pelvis, and genita-lia are skin prepared in case conversion to an open pro-cedure is required. An 18Fr Foley catheter with 10 mL

F I g . � 1

Patient�position

F I g . � 2

Position�of�the�legs

F I g . � 3

Shoulder�support

Page 98: Manual of laparoscopic urology

93Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 6

in the balloon is introduced after the placement of the sterile drapes.

The surgeon operates from the patient’s left side, and the first assistant is placed at the opposite side of the sur-geon. The laparoscopic cart is placed at the patient’s feet, while the instruments table and the coagulation unit are positioned at the left side of the patient (Fig. 4).

�Trocars�and�Laparoscopic�Instruments�

2 × 11 mm (optic 0°, bipolar grasper, and 10-mm clip applier) 3 × 5 mm (scissors, suction device, and palpator) Monopolar round-tipped scissors, bipolar grasper, dissector, 5-mm suction device, 10-mm clip applier (non-disposable), needle drivers (2), and 10-mm lap-aroscopic optic 0° (Fig. 5)

••

F I g . � 4

Laparoscopic�cart�at�patient’s�feet

F I g . � 5

Instruments�table

�Access�and�Port�Placement

See Figure 6.

�Veress�Needle

A cutaneous incision is made at the inferior and right margin of the umbilicus.

T I P

The incision should be 50% larger than the di-ameter of the 11-mm trocar.

The trocar is placed in the midline to facilitate access to the right epigastric vessels in case injury to these vessels occurs during insertion of the fourth trocar. The Veress

Page 99: Manual of laparoscopic urology

94 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

needle is introduced through the incision, and pneumo-peritoneum is started (see Chap. 1, Veress Needle Intro-duction).

�First�Port�(11�mm,�optic�0°)

Once pneumoperitoneum is established, the needle is removed, and the 11-mm port is introduced through the same incision, perpendicularly to the abdominal wall.

T I P

Pneumoperitoneum is established with an intra-abdominal pressure higher than 10 mmHg.

The optic is inserted through the port.

T I P

After trocar placement and obturator removal, the trocar valve is briefly opened to check for egress of CO

2, confirming it is correctly placed

inside the abdomen. The insufflator line is then connected to the trocar.

�Second�Port�(11�mm,�bipolar�grasper)

A cutaneous incision is made 2 cm medial and superior to the left anterior superior iliac spine for insertion of the 11-mm trocar.

F I g . � 6

Access�and�port�placement�(This�figure�was�published�in�Wein:�Campbell-Walsh�Urology,�9th�ed.,�Copyright�Elsevier)

Page 100: Manual of laparoscopic urology

95Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 6

T I P

During trocar introduction, once the cutting tip pierces the peritoneum, the position of the device is secured, allowing further gliding of the trocar to a desired site. This maneuver prevents block-age of the movements of the working instruments following an incorrect insertion.

�Third�Port�(5�mm,�suction�device)

A cutaneous incision is made 2 cm medial and superior to the right anterior superior iliac spine for introduction of the 5-mm trocar.

�Fourth�Port�(5�mm,��monopolar�round-tipped�scissors)

For insertion of the 5-mm trocar, a cutaneous incision is made at a point situated at the junction of the lateral 2/3 and medial 1/3 distance between the right anterior iliac spine trocar and the umbilicus trocar.

T I P

Pay attention to the epigastric vessels, which can be visualized by pressing the right lateral part of the abdomen.

�Fifth�Port�(5�mm,�palpator)

A 5-mm port is medially placed two fingers above the pubis bone to complete placement of the ports (Fig. 7).

The operating table is moved down and backward, and the patient is placed in an extended Trendelenburg position. Steps are placed under the surgeon, and the bipolar and monopolar pedals are placed over the step. The surgeon, positioned higher than the assistant, can then use the working instruments (bipolar grasper and monopolar scissors) without being restrained by the as-sistant holding the optic in the upper midline position (Fig. 8a,b). This maneuver reduces the conflict between the operative team’s arms.

�Surgical�Technique

�Bowel�Displacement�

The intestine is positioned above the promontory by gently pushing back the loops of the small bowel with the aid of the Trendelenburg position. If necessary, the cecum is dissected off the posterior peritoneum to in-crease its mobility and assist in the cranial displacement of the small bowel. To facilitate the left-side dissection, the sigmoid and its mesocolon are laterally displaced and fixed to the abdominal wall using a monofilament 2-0 straight needle suture.

F I g . � 7

Ports�in�place

Page 101: Manual of laparoscopic urology

96 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

T I P

The suture needle is passed through the skin at a point lateral and cranial to the left port, placed through the appendices epiploicae of the sigmoid colon, and exited close to the entrance point. It is held in place by a Kocher clamp.

The fixation has to be released for the left pelvic wall dis-section.

�Pelvic�Lymphadenectomy

In selected cases, a standard pelvic lymphadenectomy is bilaterally performed using a “split and roll” technique.

The posterior peritoneum above and lateral to the ex-ternal iliac artery is incised with monopolar scissors. The genitofemoral nerve, which is the lateral limit of the node dissection, should be identified and preserved as it courses over the psoas muscle. The lymphatic tissue is lifted off the surface of the muscle and swept medially toward the iliac vessels. The tissue anterior to the iliac artery is longitudinally divided using the monopolar scissors, and the dissection extends to its lateral, medial, and inferior sides. The same dissection is done on the iliac vein.

At the caudal limit of the dissection, in the angle between Cooper’s ligament and the inferior aspect of the external iliac vein, the nodal package over the external iliac artery and vein is clipped (XL Hem-o-lok

F I g . � 8

a�Steps�under�the�surgeon.�b�Operative�team’s�position�

Page 102: Manual of laparoscopic urology

97Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 6

clips) and transected to reduce the occurrence of a lym-phocele.

T I P

The node of Cloquet is dissected at the junction of the femoral canal.

The dissection is then carried down behind the iliac ves-sels, where the lateral component of the lymphatic tissue is swept under the vessels and brought to the obturator fossa. The lymphatic package is then carefully mobilized off the obturator neurovascular bundle.

T I P

Care must be taken not to injure the obturator nerve.

The dissection at this level is bordered by the obliter-ated umbilical artery, which is the medial limit of the dissection and should be preserved. Small lymphatic vessels are ligated with Ligaclip II ML. The ureter is ex-posed at the place where it crosses the iliac artery, and it is then medially displaced together with the medial leaf of the posterior peritoneum. The nodal dissection progresses cranially to the bifurcation of the common iliac artery, which is the cephalad limit of the dissection. The hypogastric artery (posterior limit of the dissection) is stripped of lymphatic tissue, with extreme care taken not to injure the hypogastric vein. The dissected package is then clipped (XL Hem-o-lok) and removed through the left 11-mm port.

�Douglas�Pouch�Incision�and�Dissection�of�the�Seminal�Vesicles

The posterior peritoneum at the level of the Douglas pouch is transversally incised at the level of the seminal vesicles bilaterally (Fig. 9).

T I P

In thin patients, the outline of the vas deferens can be followed to the seminal vesicles; other-wise, the peritoneum is incised 1–2 cm above the Douglas pouch level.

The plane of loose areolar tissue that contains the semi-nal vesicles is dissected to expose its posteroinferior side (Figs. 10 and 11).

T I P

Be careful not to injure the ureters that course just lateral to the seminal vesicles at this point.

The vas deferens is bilaterally dissected, and its vascular pedicles are coagulated.

T I P

Coagulate the vascular pedicle situated posterior to the vas with the bipolar forceps.

F I g . � 9

Douglas�pouch�incision�

Page 103: Manual of laparoscopic urology

98 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

Both vasa are then transected. The dissection of the seminal vesicles and its vascular pedicles, which must be thoroughly coagulated, leaves them attached only to the prostate. By lifting both vasa deferentia and the seminal vesicles with a grasper, the Denonvilliers’ fascia is exposed (see Dissection of the Seminal Vesicles and Exposure of Denonvilliers’ Fascia, Fig. 21).

T I P

Denonvilliers’ Fascia can be dissected at a later stage.

�Anterior�Dissection—Retzius�Space

The anterior peritoneum is incised medial to the obliter-ated umbilical artery (medial umbilical ligament) at the femoral ring (Fig. 12), and a plane between the prevesi-cal fat and the lateral pelvic wall is developed.

The incision of the peritoneum continues transver-sally to the contralateral side, forming an arch cephalad to the bladder and inferior to the umbilicus. The urachus (median umbilical ligament) is identified and divided.

T I P

Be careful not to injure the dome of the bladder at this level.

The plane between the prevesical fat and the anterior abdominal wall is developed (Retzius space, Fig. 13),

F I g . � 1 0

Exposure�of�loose�areolar�tissue

F I g . � 1 1

Seminal�vesicle�(SV)

F I g . � 1 2

Obliterated�umbilical�artery

Page 104: Manual of laparoscopic urology

99Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 6

exposing the endopelvic fascia bilaterally and the San-torini plexus medially.

T I P

From this step onward, the progress of the dissec-tion is similar to Laparoscopic Extraperitoneal Radical Prostatectomy.

�Peritoneum�Displacement�and�Exposure�of�the�Bladder�Neck

The fatty tissue around the prostate is freed, starting lat-erally from the reflection of the endopelvic wall toward the midline on both sides (Fig. 14).

T I P

A little traction on the tissue opens the right plane, and it is easier to start the dissection at the endopelvic fascia.

The fibroareolar and fatty tissue attached at the level of the Santorini plexus and over the anterior surface of the prostate are pulled down toward the bladder neck with gentle but firm traction with the bipolar grasper. The su-perficial branch of the deep dorsal vein complex is co-agulated with the bipolar grasper and cut with the cold scissors (Fig. 15).

T I P

The superficial branch is transected at a safe distance from the pubic bone to prevent retrac-tion of the vein and to permit easy vessel control in the case of bleeding.

The fatty tissue downward traction maneuver contin-ues until resistance is encountered, signaling the ap-proach of the bladder neck. The dissected fatty tissue is then lifted and divided in the midline to facilitate the coagulation and transection of the vessels that overlie the bladder neck. The removal of this fatty tissue facili-tates visualization and dissection of the bladder neck, which is usually located under the crossing of the fibers of the puboprostatic ligaments (Fig. 16).

F I g . � 1 3

Retzius�space�(R);�Bladder�(B);�Pubic�bone�(P)�

F I g . � 1 4

Fatty�tissue�covering�the�prostate

Page 105: Manual of laparoscopic urology

100 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

T I P

The superficial veins of the Santorini plexus travel between the puboprostatic ligaments and are the centrally located veins overlying the blad-der neck and prostate. There are communicating branches over the bladder itself and into the en-dopelvic fascia, so it is important to coagulate the vessels over the bladder neck when removing the fatty tissue at this level.

�Bladder�Neck�Dissection�and�Division

The bladder neck is situated under the crossing of the fibers of the puboprostatic ligaments (Fig. 17).

A transversal incision with the monopolar scissors, along with forceful counter pressure with the bipolar grasper, which is placed over the bladder, opens the su-perficial layer and exposes the correct plane of dissec-tion (Fig. 18).

F I g . � 1 5

Superficial�veins�of�the�Santorini�plexus�(A)

F I g . � 1 6

Anterior�prostatic�surface�free�of�fatty�tissue

F I g . � 1 7

Bladder�neck�(A);�Puboprostatic�ligaments�(B)

Page 106: Manual of laparoscopic urology

101Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 6

The incision progresses to assume an inverted U-shape to avoid entering through the lateral sides of the prostate. At the medial portion of the dissection, the longitudinal muscle fibers of the anterior wall of the urethra are exposed (Fig. 19). The urethra is dissected at its anterior and lateral aspect and then transversally incised close to the bladder neck to avoid perioperative urinary retention.

The Foley catheter is removed, and a metal 45 Fr bougie is introduced to facilitate elevation of the pros-tate. The dissection of the posterior plane between the bladder neck and the prostate is initiated with a U-shaped incision on the posterior urethral wall. To dissect the right lateral side of the bladder neck, the bipolar grasper with the jaws in the “closed” position is introduced into the bladder. The monopolar scissors, placed at the external lateral side of the bladder, touch the tip of the grasper to confirm the limits of the lateral dissection. The lateral side of the bladder is dissected, and by applying downward tension on the grasper that now holds the anterolateral bladder wall, the correct plane between the posterior bladder neck and the pros-tate is developed.

T I P

Care must be taken not to perforate the bladder at this level as the ureteral orifices are in close proximity.

The dissection is carried out from the lateral side to the center and extends to the other side to fully separate the bladder neck from the base of the prostate (Fig. 20).

�Dissection�of�the�Seminal�Vesicles�and�Exposure�of�Denonvilliers’�Fascia

The plane of longitudinal muscle fibers behind the blad-der neck (Bell’s muscle layer) is horizontally incised to expose the previously dissected retrovesical space. The vasa deferentia and the seminal vesicles are then elevated with the grasper to facilitate dissection of the posterior plane of the prostate from the Denonvilliers’ fascia. If not already dissected, this fascia is bluntly incised, and with downward pressure of the suction device placed at

F I g . � 1 8

Dissection�of�bladder�neck�(A)

F I g . � 1 9

Anterior�wall�of�the�urethra�(A)

Page 107: Manual of laparoscopic urology

102 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

the incision, the posterior surface of the prostate is re-leased.

There are three planes of dissection at this level (Fig. 21):

A. A plane that extends into the prostate (the wrong plane of dissection!) B. A plane between the Denonvilliers’ fascia and the prostate, which is the plane developed for preserva-tion of the neurovascular bundle C. A posterior plane between the rectum and the Denonvilliers’ fascia, developed in cases of wide ex-cision of the prostate without neurovascular bundle preservation.

�Endopelvic�Fascia��and�Puboprostatic�Ligaments

The two layers of the endopelvic fascia are separated using gentle and forceful lateral traction and counter-traction at the level of the bladder neck (Fig. 22). The fi-bers should not be divided close to the prostate to avoid lacerating the large veins that cross lateroposterior to the prostate. As the two layers of endopelvic fascia be-come more adherent moving toward the apex, they are then incised with the monopolar scissors to open the plane between the prostate and the endopelvic fascia (Fig. 23a,b).

F I g . � 2 0

Opened�bladder�neck�with�Foley�catheter

F I g . � 2 1

Three�posterior�planes�of�prostate�dissection�(see�text):�(A),�(B),�and�(C)

F I g . � 2 2

Right�endopelvic�fascia�

Page 108: Manual of laparoscopic urology

103Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 6

The dissection continues upward to liberate the peri-urethral muscle from the prostatic apex.

T I P

The muscle is bluntly separated from the lateral side of the apex with cold scissors and laterally displaced to the pelvic wall to facilitate the dor-sal venous complex ligature.

The puboprostatic ligament is cut close to the pubic bone, and the vessels are carefully dissected to expose the plane between the pubic bone and the dorsal venous complex of the penis.

T I P

If bleeding occurs at this stage, the prostate is lifted with the metal bougie and pressed against the pubic bone.

The same dissection is done at the other side, and the dorsal venous complex is ready to be ligated (Fig. 24).

F I g . � 2 3

a�Endopelvic�fascia�layers�divided.�b�Incision�with�monopolar�scissors

F I g . � 2 4

Dorsal�venous�complex�of�the�penis

Page 109: Manual of laparoscopic urology

104 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

�Dorsal�Venous�Complex�of�the�Penis�(DVC)

The Santorini deep venous plexus at the apex of the pros-tate is ligated with Polysorb 0 CL 802 (needle ½ 40 mm) but not immediately cut. The needle is passed from right to left in the avascular plane between the urethra and the dorsal vein complex.

T I P

The position of the needle in the needle driver is with the tip facing down to the left and with an angle of 90°.

The needle is loaded on the tissue and elevated. Then it is advanced to the other side and finally turned to be exited at the same entrance point level on the counterla-teral side (Fig 25a,b).

�Identification�and�Preservation�of�the�Neurovascular�Bundle�

The neurovascular bundles are dissected and preserved, depending on anatomic and oncologic conditions. The

posterolateral surface of the prostate is exposed by roll-ing it sideways, and sometimes the metal bougie must be removed to facilitate this maneuver. The fascial lay-ers are incised with cold scissors, and the neurovascu-lar bundle is gently separated from the prostate, taking particular care not to disrupt the prostatic capsule. The dissection is carried out in an “antegrade” or “descend-ing” manner bilaterally, and the use of coagulation is prohibited to avoid damage to the neurovascular bundle (Fig. 26).

T I P

As the neurovascular bundle usually runs at a minimal distance from the prostate at the level of the apex, the dissection of the bundle is easier at this level.

The suction device should be positioned at a level infe-rior to the dissection to aspirate the blood off the oper-ating field.

F I g . � 2 5

a�Santorini�deep�venous�plexus�ligation�(A).�b�Angle�of�needle�introduction�(90°)

Page 110: Manual of laparoscopic urology

105Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 6

T I P

The maneuver to dissect the neurovascular bun-dle at the right side is medial displacement of the posterolateral side of the prostate with the aid of the grasper and dissection with the monopolar scissors; for the left side, both instruments are used alternately.

�The�Prostatic�Pedicles�

There are several techniques to approach the prostatic pedicles, and they should be individualized for each pa-tient. The prostate is lifted with the metal bougie to put the pedicles under tension. The pedicle is controlled at a safe distance from the neurovascular bundle and high on the base of the prostate. It is cut with cold mono-polar scissors close to the prostate, and coagulation of bleeding vessels should be avoided at all times if potency preservation is being considered.

�Technique�1�

Passing a Vicryl 0 at the base of the prostatic pedicle (superficial to the neurovascular bundle), and tying the knot but not cutting the needle. The pedicle is cut with cold scissors and at the same time the vessels are care-fully dissected and tied with the suture already in place. In this technique, the dissection of the neurovascular bundle begins from the posterolateral side of the pros-tate, and is done after the section of the vascular pedicle. (Fig 27a–c)

T I P

Two rounds of suture should be passed at every stage, and too much space should not be left in between the running suture to avoid tearing the tissue while performing the final knot.

�Technique�2

This technique involves passing a dissector underneath the pedicle close to the prostate, at right angles to its axis, and placing a simple suture of Vicryl 0 at the tip of the clamp to be tied intracorporally. This suture should not encompass the neurovascular bundle that runs par-allel to the prostatic pedicle (Fig. 28). To pass the dis-sector through the left pedicle, the dissector is inserted through the right iliac spine port, and the suction device is placed through the paraumbilical port.

�Technique�3

In the third technique, the pedicle is cut with cold scis-sors and, at the same time, the vessels are dissected and clipped with small size (5 mm) Hem-o-lok clips, taking care not to compromise the prostatic margins. In this technique, the dissection of the neurovascular bundle begins from the posterolateral side of the pros-tate and is done after the section of the vascular pedicle (Fig. 29a–c).

F I g . � 2 6

Left�neurovascular�bundle�(A);�Prostate�(B)�

Page 111: Manual of laparoscopic urology

106 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

�Technique�4

The final technique involves placing bilateral atraumatic vascular bulldog clamps (with long arms), which are in-troduced with the aid of a laparoscopic bulldog clamp applier. They are placed in a proximal position at the prostatic pedicle, approximately 1 cm from the prostate. After transecting the vascular pedicle, either a suture or fibrin sealant can be used to control the bleeding follow-ing removal of the vascular clamps (Fig. 30).

T I P

The Denonvilliers’ fascia must be longitudinally incised on both sides of the rectum for the cor-rect placement of the long arms’ bulldog clamp.

After the pedicles are incised, the metal bougie is pulled back from the urethra to facilitate elevation of the pros-tate. The posterior attachments to the Denonvilliers’

F I g . � 2 7

a�Right�prostatic�pedicle�suturing.�b�Left�prostatic�pedicle�suturing.�c�Prostatic�pedicle�–�vessel�ligation�

Page 112: Manual of laparoscopic urology

107Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 6

F I g . � 2 9

a� Neurovascular� bundle� (NVB);� Prostatic� pedicle� vessel�(V).� b� Neurovascular� bundle� dissected� with� cold� scissors.�c�Neurovascular�bundle�laterally�displaced�

F I g . � 2 8

a�Dissector�under�right�prostatic�pedicle.�b�Thread�placed�at� the� tip� of� the� dissector.� c Thread� encompasses� right�prostatic�pedicle

Page 113: Manual of laparoscopic urology

108 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

fascia and the posterolateral attachments to the neuro-vascular bundle are released up to the apex with blunt and sharp dissection. The gland is now only connected to the deep venous complex and the urethra.

F I g . � 3 0

Bulldog�clamp�at�the�pedicle

F I g . � 3 1

Dorsal�vein�complex�division�

F I g . � 3 2

Prostatourethral�junction�divided�

F I g . � 3 3

Prostate�released�

Page 114: Manual of laparoscopic urology

109Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 6

�Division�of�the�Dorsal�Vein�Complex�and�Urethra

By applying downward pressure on the metal bougie, the anterior surface of the prostate is exposed. The dorsal vein complex is divided at the apex with cold scissors, and the initial incisions are tangential to the prostate to avoid inadvertent entry into the gland (Fig. 31). By moving the metal bougie sideways, the urethra is dis-sected at its lateral sides until the prostatourethral junc-tion is visualized.

T I P

It is important at this stage to follow the ana-tomic contours of the prostate.

The metal bougie is retracted to allow the transection of the urethra as close to the apex as possible (Fig. 32).

T I P

After cutting the anterior wall of the urethra, the metal bougie is lifted to expose the posterior ure-thral wall.

The prostate is released, and the operative site is care-fully inspected for bleeding (Fig. 33). A small endobag is introduced through the left 11-mm port, and the prostate is inserted into it. The bag with the specimen is left inside to be removed at the end of the procedure (Fig. 34).

T I P

A retractor is introduced through the 11-mm left iliac spine port, and the port is partially re-moved over it. The string of the bag is exterior-ized through the outer surface of the port, and the port is replaced over the retractor. The bag is then pulled out and partially exteriorized, fixing the prostate away from the operative field.

�Bladder�Neck�Reconstruction�and�Urethrovesical�Anastomosis

When the bladder neck needs to be reconstructed, a posterior running suture of Vicryl 2-0 is used to ap-proximate full-thickness muscularis and mucosa, form-ing a tennis racket closure. It is important to visualize the position of the ureteral orifices before the closure is initiated to avoid inadvertent passage of the suture through the ureter. The bladder neck is narrowed to ap-proximate the diameter of the urethra. The anastomosis between the bladder neck and the urethra is performed by interrupted sutures of Polysorb 2-0 GL 123 (needle ½ 26 mm). The lateral movements of the metal bougie inserted at the urethra aid in the passage of the needle. Beginning at the posterior bladder neck, a U-shaped suture is placed from the inside–outside at the bladder level; from the outside–inside of the lumen of the ure-thra; from the inside–outside of the lumen of the ure-thra; and finally from the outside–inside of the lumen of the bladder. The double-looped knot, placed inside the bladder neck, is spontaneously self-blocked due to the tension applied to the threads, allowing the bladder and urethra to be approached together (Fig. 35a–f).

F I g . � 3 4

Prostate�inserted�into�endobag

Page 115: Manual of laparoscopic urology

110 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

F I g . � 3 5

Posterior� vesicourethral� suture� sequence:� a� Initial� suture� at� bladder� neck.� b� Suture� at� posterior� right� side� of� urethra.� c� Suture�exiting�urethral�lumen,�right�side.�d�Suture�entering�left�posterior�side�of�urethra.�e�Final�suture�at�bladder�neck.�f�Bladder�neck�approaching�urethra

Page 116: Manual of laparoscopic urology

111Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 6

T I P

If tension is encountered at this step, the insuf-flator pressure and the Trendelenburg position are reduced to facilitate the anastomosis.

The metal bougie is placed inside the bladder, guiding the passage of the needle for the following sutures.

Two sets of lateral sutures alternating at the 5, 7, 2, and 10 o’ clock positions (Figs. 36a,b and 37) and a U- shaped suture at the 12 o’ clock position with the knot on the outside are introduced (Fig. 38a–d). This U-shaped suture can also be used to close the bladder neck anteriorly, if necessary. Traction should be avoided at all times while passing the sutures to prevent tearing of the urethral wall.

T I P

The right posterior sutures are done with the right hand, and the left posterior sutures are done with the left hand. For the anterior sutures, the instrument is crossed in the midline. The po-sition of the needle on the needle holder is 2/3 posterior at a 45º angle for the posterior and an-terior sutures and at a 90° angle for the lateral sutures.

A silicone 18 Fr Foley catheter is introduced through a guide after the anastomosis is completely performed to avoid puncture of the catheter.

F I g . � 3 6

Right�lateral�vesicourethral�suture�sequence:�a�Suture�entering�lateral�bladder�side.�b�Suture�entering�lateral�side�of�urethra�

F I g . � 3 7

Left�lateral�vesicourethral�suture

Page 117: Manual of laparoscopic urology

112 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

T I P

The guide with the catheter should be laterally moved inside the bladder to confirm it is in the correct intravesical position.

The balloon is filled with 10 mL of saline, and the in-tegrity of the anastomosis is demonstrated by filling the bladder with 200 mL of irrigation fluid.

The prostate is removed by enlarging the left iliac spine port site.

T I P

To enlarge the incision for the passage of the bag containing the prostate, the skin is cut at its me-dial end, and the fascia is cut at the lateral end to avoid injuring the epigastric vessels.

A Penrose drain is positioned close to the anastomosis and exited through the right iliac spine port site. The aponeurosis of the 11-mm port is closed with Polysorb 0 sutures, and the skin is closed with running intradermic Monocryl 3-0.

F I g . � 3 8

Anterior�vesicourethral�suture�sequence:�a�Initial�suture�at�right�anterior�bladder�side.�b�Suture�exiting�at�right�anterior�urethral�side.�c�Suture�entering�urethral�left�anterior�side.�d�Final�knot

Page 118: Manual of laparoscopic urology

113Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Radical ProstatectomyChapter 6

�Postoperative�Considerations

The nasogastric tube is removed at the end of the pro-cedure. The patient is given appropriate analgesia as per protocol, including intravenous paracetamol during the first 24 h and major analgesics as necessary. The intra-venous perfusion is stopped on day 1 after surgery, oral fluids are started the morning after surgery, and a light diet can generally be resumed on day 2. The suprapubic drain is usually removed after 48–72 h or after secretions are below 50 mL. The bladder catheter is removed on day 5 after surgery if the urine is clear, but in case of per-sistent residual haematuria, a cystogram is performed. Normal activity is resumed four weeks after surgery.

�Suggested�Readings

Levinson AW, Su LM: Laparoscopic radical prostatectomy: current techniques. Curr Opin Urol 2007 Mar; 17(2):98–103.Stolzenburg JU, Schwalenberg T: Anatomical landmarks of radical prostatectomy. Eur Urol 2007 Mar; 51(3):629–639.Rassweiler I, Seemann 0: Laparoscopic versus open radical prostatectomy: a comparative study at a single institution. J Urol 2003 May; 169(5):1689–1693.Guillonneau B, el-Fettouh H: Laparoscopic radical prosta-tectomy: oncological evaluation after 1,000 cases at Mont-souris Institute. J Urol 2003 Apr; 169(4):1261–1266.Guillonneau B, Rozet F: Perioperative complications of laparoscopic radical prostatectomy: the Montsouris 3-year experience. J Urol 2002 Jan; 167(1):51–56. Hull GW, Rabbani F: Cancer control with radical prostatec-tomy alone in 1,000 consecutive patients. J Urol 2002 Feb; 167(2 Pt 1):528–534.Türk I, Deger S: Laparoscopic radical prostatectomy. Tech-nical aspects and experience with 125 cases. Eur Urol 2001 Jul; 40(1):46–52; discussion 53.Schuessler WW, Schulam PG: Laparoscopic radical prosta-tectomy: initial short-term experience. Urology 1997 Dec; 50(6):854–857.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Page 119: Manual of laparoscopic urology

�Introduction

Open radical cystectomy is the reference standard treatment for muscle-invasive bladder cancer or recur-rent high-grade superficial bladder cancer. It is usually performed in elderly individuals with associated medi-cal conditions, and the procedure can cause significant stress for patients. Following the introduction of laparo-scopic radical prostatectomy and the resulting decrease in patient morbidity and recovery time, laparoscopic radical cystectomy has rapidly evolved. The oncological outcomes of the laparoscopic approach are comparable to the open procedure, and the urinary diversion can be performed completely laparoscopically or by open sur-gery with a minimal incision. The use of LigaSure facili-tates the dissection, reducing intraoperative blood loss, operative time, and subsequent operative costs.

�Preoperative�Preparation

Before a patient consents to a laparoscopic radical cys-tectomy, it is important to discuss the specific risks of the surgery, including the potential need to convert to the traditional open operation if difficulties arise.

The bowel preparation is initiated by a non-residue diet for five days before surgery and oral self-adminis-

Laparoscopic Transperitoneal Radical Cystectomy

Chapter 7

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . 116 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . 116 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

�Veress�Needle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117�First�Port�(11�mm,�optic�0°) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117�Second�Port�(11�mm,�bipolar�grasper) . . . . . . 118�Third�Port�(5�mm,�suction�device) . . . . . . . . . . . 119�Fourth�Port�(5�mm,�monopolar�round-tipped�scissors,�LigaSure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Radical Cystectomy in the Male . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119�Bowel�Displacement� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119�Retroperitoneal�Incision�and�Exposure��of�Iliac�Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120�Ureteral�Exposure�and�Division� . . . . . . . . . . . . 120�Pelvic�Lymphadenectomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121�Recto-Vesical�Dissection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125�Division�of�the�Anterior�Branches�of�the�Hypogastric�Vessels—LigaSure�5mm 128�Anterior�Dissection�of�the�Bladder—�LigaSure�5�mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129�Apical�Dissection� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132�The�Urinary�Diversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Radical Cystectomy in the Female . . . . . . . . . . . . 134�Ureteral�Exposure�and�Division� . . . . . . . . . . . . 134�Infundibulopelvic�Ligament�Division�and�Uterine�Displacement . . . . . . . . . 134�Pelvic�Lymphadenectomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134�Recto-Vaginal�Dissection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135�Division�of�the�Anterior�Branches�of�the�Hypogastric�Vessels—LigaSure�5mm . . . . . . . 136�Anterior�Dissection—LigaSure�5mm . . . . . . . . 136�The�Urinary�Diversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Page 120: Manual of laparoscopic urology

116 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

tration of 2 L of an electrolyte solution such as Colopeg® (1 envelope/L) over two days before the procedure. The patient is admitted two days before the operation and placed on an Ensure® or Navidish® diet and bowel prophylactic antibiotics (500 mg Flagyl® + 1 g Neomi-cine® 3 × p.o.). Fasting starts at midnight before surgery. Thromboprophylaxis is implemented with good hydra-tion, placement of compressive elastic stockings on the lower extremities, and low-molecular-weight heparin. Enoxaparin (Clexane®, Lovenox®) 40 mg sc 1 × day or nadroparin (Flaxiparine®, Fraxiparin®) 0.6 mL sc 1 × day is initiated on day 1 after the surgery and continued daily until the patient is discharged. In selected cases, the treatment is continued for 30 days after the proce-dure.

T I P

Thromboprophylaxis is important due to the concurrent risk factors of laparoscopy, cancer, and pelvic surgery.

Patients also receive antibiotic prophylaxis with intra-venous second-generation cephalosporin, unless they are allergic to penicillin. Blood type and crossmatch are determined. Preoperative marking of the potential ileal conduit stoma site by a stoma therapy nurse is routine.

�Patient�Positioning�and�Initial�Preparation

The surgery is performed under general anesthesia. The base of the table must be positioned below the patient’s hip to avoid elevation of the abdomen while in the Tren-delenburg position (Fig. 1). The patient is placed in the supine position with the lower limbs in abduction, al-lowing the laparoscopic cart to be moved closer to the surgeon and intraoperative access to the perineum. The lower buttocks must be placed at the distal end of the operating table. The upper limbs are positioned along-side the body to avoid the risk of stretch injuries to the brachial plexus and to allow for free movements of the operative team. A nasogastric catheter is placed by the anesthesiologist and the stomach decompressed to avoid

puncture during trocar placement. The abdomen, pelvis, and genitalia are skin prepared in case conversion to an open procedure is required. An 18Fr Foley catheter with 10 mL in the balloon is introduced after the placement of the sterile drapes.

The surgeon operates from the patient’s left side, and the first assistant is placed at the opposite side of the sur-geon. The laparoscopic cart is placed at the patient’s feet, while the instruments table and the coagulation unit are positioned at the left side of the patient.

�Trocars�and�Laparoscopic�Instruments�

2 × 11 mm (optic 0°, bipolar grasper) 2 × 5 mm (scissors, suction device, and LigaSure) Monopolar round-tipped scissors, bipolar grasper, 5-mm suction device, needle drivers (2), 10-mm laparoscopic optic 0°, LigaSure Atlas™ 5 mm (Tyco Healthcare)

�Access�and�Port�Placement

See Figure 2.

•••

F I g . � 1

Patient�position

Page 121: Manual of laparoscopic urology

117Laparoscopic Transperitoneal Radical CystectomyChapter 7

�Veress�Needle

A midline cutaneous incision superior to the umbilicus is made, and the Veress needle is introduced through the incision (see Chap. 1, Veress Needle Introduction).

T I P

The incision should be 50% larger than the di-ameter of the 11-mm trocar.

The insufflation tubing is connected to the Veress nee-dle, the stopcock is opened, and insufflation is initi-ated.

T I P

It is recommended to start with low flow to avoid damage to a vital structure in case the needle is malpositioned. Switch to high flow if the pres-sure of insufflation is increasing at a steady and normal level and there is also a tympanic per-cussion of the liver area.

�First�Port�(11�mm,�optic�0°)

Once pneumoperitoneum is established, the Veress needle is removed, and the 11-mm trocar is introduced through the same incision, perpendicularly to the ab-dominal wall. The optic is placed through the trocar, and the insufflator line is connected to it.

F I g . � 2

Access�and�port�placement�(This�figure�was�published�in�Wein:�Campbell-Walsh�Urology,�9th�ed.,�Copyright�Elsevier)

Page 122: Manual of laparoscopic urology

118 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

T I P

Care must be taken not to injure the aorta or vena cava due to the supraumbilical trocar intro-ductio

T I P

After trocar placement and obturator removal, the trocar valve is briefly opened to check for egress of gas, confirming it is correctly placed in-side the abdomen.

�Second�Port�(11�mm,�bipolar�grasper)

A cutaneous incision is made 2 cm medial and superior to the left anterior superior iliac spine for introduction of the 11-mm trocar.

T I P

During trocar introduction, once the cutting tip pierces the peritoneum, the position of the device is secured, allowing further gliding of the trocar to the desired position. This maneuver prevents blockage of the movements of the working in-struments following an incorrect insertion.F I g . � 3

Trocars�in�place

F I g . � 4

a�Sigmoid�displacement.�b�Fixation�to�the�abdominal�wall

Page 123: Manual of laparoscopic urology

119Laparoscopic Transperitoneal Radical CystectomyChapter 7

�Third�Port�(5�mm,�suction�device)

A cutaneous incision is made 2 cm medial and superior to the right anterior superior iliac spine for introduction of the 5-mm trocar.

�Fourth�Port�(5�mm,��monopolar�round-tipped�scissors,�LigaSure)

For insertion of the 5-mm trocar, a cutaneous incision is made at a point situated at the junction of the lateral 2/3 and medial 1/3 distance between the right anterior superior iliac spine trocar and the umbilicus trocar.

T I P

The fourth trocar should be inserted at a safe distance from the potential ileal conduit stoma site.

T I P

Pay attention to the epigastric vessels, which can be visualized by pressing the right lateral part of the abdomen.

The operating table is moved down and backward, and the patient is placed in an extended Trendelenburg posi-tion. Steps are placed under the surgeon, and the bipo-lar and monopolar pedals are placed over the step. The surgeon, positioned higher than the assistant, can ma-nipulate the working instruments (bipolar grasper and monopolar scissors) without being restrained by the as-sistant holding the optic in the upper midline position (Fig. 3). This maneuver reduces conflict between the operative team’s arms.

�Radical�Cystectomy�in�the�Male

�Bowel�Displacement�

The sigmoid is positioned above the promontory by gently pushing back the loops of the small bowel with the aid of the Trendelenburg position. If necessary, the cecum is dissected off the posterior peritoneum to in-crease its mobility and assist in the cranial displacement of the small bowel. To facilitate the left-side dissection, the sigmoid and its mesocolon can be laterally displaced to the left side and fixed to the abdominal wall using a monofilament 2-0 straight needle suture (Fig. 4a,b).

T I P

The suture needle is passed through the skin at a point lateral and cranial to the left port, placed through the appendices epiploicae of the sigmoid colon, and exited close to the entrance point. It is held in place by a Kocher clamp.

The fixation has to be released for the left pelvic wall dis-section.

F I g . � 5

Posterior�peritoneal� (P)� incision�over�the�common�iliac�ar-tery�(A)

Page 124: Manual of laparoscopic urology

120 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

�Retroperitoneal�Incision��and�Exposure�of�Iliac�Vessels

A posterior peritoneal incision is made over the right common iliac artery, and the medial peritoneal leaf is lifted to better expose the artery (Fig. 5).

T I P

It is important to place traction on the perito-neum to facilitate dissection.

The incision follows the artery caudally to a point just lateral to the medial umbilical ligament (obliterated umbilical artery), at the level of the crossing of the vas deferens (Fig. 6); cranially, the incision extends to the common iliac artery (Fig. 7).

The gonadal vessels are laterally displaced and pre-served, and the vas deferens is coagulated and tran-sected (Fig. 8).

�Ureteral�Exposure�and�Division�

The ureters are identified in the retroperitoneum just cephalad to the common iliac vessels and exposed coursing over and medially at the point of bifurcation of the iliac vessels (Fig. 9). The right ureter is dissected and mobilized close to its intramural insertion into the bladder to ensure an adequate length of free ureter for reimplantation.

F I g . � 6

Peritoneal�incision�extends�to�obliterated�umbilical�artery

F I g . � 7

Right�external�iliac�artery�exposed

F I g . � 8

Left�vas�(V)�is�coagulated�and�transected,�and�gonadal�ves-sels�(G)�are�laterally�displaced�

Page 125: Manual of laparoscopic urology

121Laparoscopic Transperitoneal Radical CystectomyChapter 7

T I P

To prevent ureteral wall injury, the ureter is grasped by the atraumatic posterior part of the grasper (Fig. 10).

T I P

A distal ureteral arterial branch from the hypo-gastric or inferior vesical artery can be coagu-lated and transected (Fig. 11).

The ureter is double-clipped (Ligaclip® II ML) close to the bladder and transected (Fig. 12a,b). A section of the proximal ureteral segment (distal to the proximal clip) is sent for frozen-section. The proximal divided ureter is left clipped during the procedure to allow for hydro-static ureteral dilatation, facilitating the uretero-enteric anastomosis. The ureter is then mobilized in a cephalad direction to prevent inadvertent injury, and the vascular supply derived laterally from the gonadal vessels should not be disturbed. The same dissection is done for the left ureter.

�Pelvic�Lymphadenectomy

The genitofemoral nerve, which is the lateral limit of the node dissection, should be identified and preserved as it courses over the right iliopsoas muscle. The right external iliac vessels are retracted medially, and the

F I g . � 9

Right�ureter�(U)�crossing�over�the�right�iliac�artery�(A)

F I g . � 1 0

Atraumatic�grasping�of�ureter

F I g . � 1 1

Distal�arterial�branch�(B)�is�coagulated;�Ureter�(U)

Page 126: Manual of laparoscopic urology

122 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

fascia overlying the muscle is incised medial to the nerve. The fibroareolar tissue is lifted off the surface of the muscle and is swept medially towards the iliac vessels.

The fibroareolar and lymphatic tissue anterior to the right external iliac artery is longitudinally divided using

the monopolar scissors, and the tissue is dissected from the artery at its lateral and medial aspect.

The same dissection is performed on the right exter-nal iliac vein.

F I g . � 1 2

a�Ureteral�clipping.�b�Ureteral�transection

F I g . � 1 3

“Flat”�iliac�vein�(V)

F I g . � 1 4

Dissected�tissue�(LT)�is�swept�over�the�psoas�(P)�to�the�ob-turator�fossa;�Iliac�vein�(V)

Page 127: Manual of laparoscopic urology

123Laparoscopic Transperitoneal Radical CystectomyChapter 7

T I P

The external iliac vein appears flat at the stan-dard pneumoperitoneum pressure (12 mmHg). To improve visualization, the pressure can be de-creased to allow re-distention of the vessel (Fig. 13).

The dissection is then carried down behind the iliac ves-sels to free the lateral and medial component attached at their base. The vessels are carefully displaced later-ally, and the lateral component of the fibroareolar and lymphatic tissue is swept under the vessels and along the psoas muscle and pelvic sidewall to the obturator fossa (Fig. 14).

At the caudal limit of the dissection, in the angle be-tween Cooper’s ligament and the inferior aspect of the external iliac vein (Fig. 15), the nodal package is double-clipped (Ligaclip II ML) and transected to reduce the occurrence of lymphocele (Fig. 16).

T I P

The node of Cloquet, representing the distal limit of the dissection at this level, is dissected at the junction of the femoral canal (Fig. 17).

A circumflex iliac vein usually runs to the external iliac vein at this location, and it can be ligated and divided if necessary.

The obturator nerve is visualized deep to the external iliac vein (Fig. 18), and the lymphatic package is then carefully mobilized off the obturator neurovascular bundle.

F I g . � 1 5

Caudal�limit�of�the�dissection�

F I g . � 1 6

Clip�at�nodal�package

F I g . � 1 7

Node� of� Cloquet� (C);� Accessory� obturator� vein� (V)� under�the�node

Page 128: Manual of laparoscopic urology

124 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

T I P

Care must be taken not to injure the obturator nerve (Fig. 19a,b).

The dissection at this level is bordered by the obliterated umbilical artery and lateral bladder wall, which is the

medial limit of the dissection. Small lymphatic vessels are clipped with Ligaclip II ML.

The dissection progresses cephalad to the bifurcation of the iliac vessels, and the hypogastric artery, which is the posterior limit of the dissection, is visualized (Fig. 20).

T I P

For an extended lymphadenectomy, the supe-rior limit of the dissection is initiated from the inferior mesenteric artery and extends laterally over the inferior vena cava. The fibroareolar and lymphatic tissue is dissected caudally off the aorta, vena cava. and common iliac vessels over the sacral promontory.

The lymphatic tissue is gently stripped of the hypogas-tric artery (Fig. 21), and care must be taken not to injure the hypogastric vein (Fig. 22).

The dissected package is then clipped (XL Hem-o-lok clips) and transected. The specimen is removed through the left 11-mm port after being placed into a bag (En-doCatch).The same dissection (Fig. 23) is done on the left side.

F I g . � 1 8

Obturator�nerve� (N)�visualized�medial� to�the�external� iliac�vein�(V);�Lymphatic�tissue�(LT)

F I g . � 1 9

a�Obturator�fossa.�b�Obturator�artery�and�nerve

Page 129: Manual of laparoscopic urology

125Laparoscopic Transperitoneal Radical CystectomyChapter 7

�Recto-Vesical�Dissection

The lateral limit of the posterior peritoneum to be in-cised and removed with the specimen is already defined (medial to the spermatic vessels in men and lateral to the

infundibulopelvic ligament in women). A transversal in-cision is made in the posterior peritoneum bordering the lateral aspect of the sigmoid colon (Fig. 24a,b), and the incision progresses to arrive at the level of the Doug-las pouch (Fig. 25).

F I g . � 2 0

Hypogastric�artery

F I g . � 2 1

Hypogastric�artery�dissected

F I g . � 2 2

Hypogastric� vein� (Hy);� Obturator� vein� (V);� Nerve� (N);� Ar-tery�(A)�

F I g . � 2 3

Right-side�dissection�

Page 130: Manual of laparoscopic urology

126 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

The Douglas pouch is transversally incised close to its superior deflection, and the same procedure is made on the left side (Fig. 26a,b).

The plane of loose areolar tissue that contains the seminal vesicles is dissected to expose its posteroinferior side (Fig. 27).

When started high enough, the dissection is able to leave the Denonvilliers’ fascia covering the seminal vesicles. The ampullae and seminal vesicles are not dis-sected from the bladder and instead remain attached to it throughout the procedure (Fig. 28).

The dissection continues posterior and lateral to the seminal vesicles to expose the Denonvilliers’ fascia.

T I P

To maintain potency, the dissection of this plane is done between the prostate and the Denonvil-liers’ fascia (above the fascia), the same as for the extraperitoneal laparoscopic radical pros-tatectomy with neurovascular bundle preser-vation. The dissection extends posterior to the prostate and to the apex.

The posterior layer of Denonvilliers’ fascia is trans-versally incised to expose the perirectal fatty space. When dissecting below the fascia, the plane is followed laterally to arrive at the lateral rectal wall, creating a plane between the rectum and the levator ani muscles bilaterally.

F I g . � 2 4

a�Posterior�peritoneum�transversally�incised.�b�Peritoneal�incision�parallel�to�sigmoid�colon�(S)

F I g . � 2 5

Peritoneal�incision�(P)�extends�to�Douglas�pouch�(DP)

Page 131: Manual of laparoscopic urology

127Laparoscopic Transperitoneal Radical CystectomyChapter 7

T I P

The assistant positions the suction device at the inferior part of the dissection and pushes down on the tissue at every step of the dissection to facilitate access to the right plane.

The seminal vesicles, bladder, and prostate are then sep-arated from the rectum, which will facilitate the second part of the bladder dissection.

F I g . � 2 6

a�Douglas�pouch�transversally�incised.�b�Left-side�incision�of�posterior�peritoneum�

F I g . � 2 7

Exposure�of�loose�areolar�tissue

F I g . � 2 8

Seminal�vesicle�(SV)

Page 132: Manual of laparoscopic urology

128 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

T I P

The recto-vesical dissection can be performed before the lymphadenectomy to prevent intra-peritoneal contents falling into the operative field, particularly in obese patients.

�Division�of�the�Anterior�Branches�of�the�Hypogastric�Vessels—LigaSure�5mm

Following the dissection of the obturator fossa, the lateral vascular pedicle to the bladder is ready to be ligated and divided with the use of the LigaSure 5mm.

T I P

The LigaSure 5 mm (settings—III and 01/01) can be used as a dissecting instrument due to its small tip.

The hypogastric vessels are bilaterally dissected, expos-ing the anterior branches. The initial arterial branch is usually the superior vesical artery (Fig. 29)—the termi-

F I g . � 2 9

Internal� iliac� artery� (Hypog);� Superior� vesical� artery�(Sup�Ves�Art)

F I g . � 3 0

LigaSure�at�superior�vesical�artery

F I g . � 3 1

LigaSure�at�middle�vesical�branches�

nal section of the pervious portion of the obliterated um-bilical artery—which is coagulated and transected (Fig. 30). Middle and inferior vesical arteries and branches of the middle hemorrhoidal artery that anastomose with the inferior vesical artery are also coagulated and tran-sected (Fig. 31).

Page 133: Manual of laparoscopic urology

129Laparoscopic Transperitoneal Radical CystectomyChapter 7

T I P

The hypogastric artery is not ligated to avoid potential compromise of blood flow to the inter-nal pudendal artery and possible vasculogenic impotence.

Using the LigaSure, the posterolateral dissection of the bladder and prostate is extended caudally to the pros-tatic apex; laterally, the posterior pedicle is ligated and divided to the endopelvic fascia, which is opened adja-cent to the prostate (Figs. 32a,b and 33).

T I P

The previous dissection of the lateral border of the rectum allows for a safe dissection at this time, and opening the endopelvic fascia will help to identify the distal limit of the lateral vesical pedicle as well as aid in the control of the vessels of the prostatic apex.

The same dissection is done on the contralateral side (Fig. 34).

�Anterior�Dissection��of�the�Bladder—LigaSure�5�mm

At this point of the dissection, the bladder remains sus-pended through its anterior attachments. The anterior peritoneum lateral to the obliterated umbilical artery is

F I g . � 3 2

a�LigaSure�at�endopelvic�fascia.�b�Endopelvic�fascia�opened

F I g . � 3 3

LigaSure�at�the�prostatic�pedicle�(Ped);�Prostate�(Pr)

Page 134: Manual of laparoscopic urology

130 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

incised from the inguinal ring to the umbilicus, and a lateral plane is developed between the prevesical fat and the pelvic wall (Fig. 35a,b).

T I P

The bladder can be filled with 200 mL of saline to facilitate this part of the dissection.

The inverted U-shaped incision of the peritoneum con-tinues to the contralateral side, cephalad to the bladder and inferior to the umbilicus (Fig. 36a,b).

The urachus (median umbilical ligament) and the obliterated umbilical artery (medial umbilical ligament) are identified and divided. The bladder is emptied, and the plane between the prevesical fat and the anterior ab-dominal wall is further dissected (Retzius space).

The lateral portion of the pubis bone is visualized (Fig. 37a,b), and the bladder is separated from the ante-rior abdominal wall (Fig. 38).

With a combination of sharp and blunt dissection, the space between the lateral wall of the bladder and the pelvic side wall exposes the already opened endopelvic fascia bilaterally and the Santorini venous plexus me-dially. The superficial branch of the deep dorsal vein is then coagulated and divided over the anterior aspect of the prostate (Fig. 39).

F I g . � 3 4

Bladder� (B)� pedicles� bilaterally� sectioned;� Rectum� (R);� En-dopelvic�fascia�(E.fascia)�opened

F I g . � 3 5

a�Peritoneum�lateral�to�the�bladder�incised.�b�Plane�is�developed�between�prevesical�fat�and�pelvic�wall�

Page 135: Manual of laparoscopic urology

131Laparoscopic Transperitoneal Radical CystectomyChapter 7

The plane between the prostate and the endopelvic fascia is developed, and the neurovascular bundles are dissected and preserved, depending on anatomic and oncologic conditions.

T I P

If the patient is a candidate for nerve-sparing radical cystoprostatectomy, the steps for neu-rovascular bundle dissection are the same as for nerve-sparing radical prostatectomy (see Chap. 5).

F I g . � 3 6

a�Supravesical�peritoneal�incision.�b�Incision�extending�to�contralateral�side

F I g . � 3 7

a�Pubic�bone,�right�lateral�portion.�b�Pubic�bone,�left�lateral�portion�

Page 136: Manual of laparoscopic urology

132 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

�Apical�Dissection�

The puboprostatic ligaments are bilaterally cut, and the dorsal vein complex is ligated with Polysorb® 0 CL 802 (needle ½ 40 mm) and divided (Fig. 40).

The prostatic apex is dissected, exposing the ure-thra, which is ligated with Polysorb 0 CL 802 (needle

½ 40 mm) and transected following removal of the blad-der catheter (Fig. 41a–c).

The proximal urinary lumen is never opened, pre-venting cell spillage; the distal urethra is left open. Fi-nally, the distal insertions of Denonvilliers’ fascia with rectourethral attachments are sectioned, releasing the operative specimen.

T I P

Care must be taken not to injure the rectum at this level.

The left lateral 11-mm port is removed for the introduc-tion of a 15-mm EndoCatch® bag, and the specimen is placed inside the bag. The EndoCatch arm is removed, leaving the bag inside, and the 11-mm port is reintro-duced.

A careful revision of homeostasis is performed.

�The�Urinary�Diversion

When an ileal conduit urinary diversion is performed, an opening is made on the mesosigmoid to allow for the left ureter to be moved to the right side of the sig-moid colon. A grasper is introduced through the 5-mm

F I g . � 3 8

Retzius�space�(R);�Bladder�(B);�Pubic�bone�(P)�

F I g . � 3 9

Superficial�branch�of�the�deep�dorsal�vein

F I g . � 4 0

Dorsal�venous�complex�ligation

Page 137: Manual of laparoscopic urology

133Laparoscopic Transperitoneal Radical CystectomyChapter 7

port lateral to the umbilicus to hold the ureters; another grasper is introduced through the right lateral port and the distal portion of ileum that will be selected for the fashioning of the ileal conduit is secured. The optic is now placed at the left 11-mm port, and a grasper intro-duced through the supraumbilical 11-mm port holds and exteriorizes the EndoCatch bag string. The optic and laparoscopic instruments (except the grasper at the 5-mm port) are removed, but the abdomen is left in-flated to facilitate the opening of the abdominal wall.

A small supraumbilical midline incision is made for the execution of the urinary diversion procedure in an open fashion. The specimen is removed through this in-cision.

A silicone Penrose drain is placed at the end of the procedure.

F I g . � 4 1

a�Urethral�dissection.�b�Urethral�ligation�following�catheter�removal.�c�Urethral�division

Page 138: Manual of laparoscopic urology

134 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

�Radical�Cystectomy�in�the�Female

�Ureteral�Exposure�and�Division�

The ureters are addressed as above.

�Infundibulopelvic�Ligament�Division�and�Uterine�Displacement

The right ovary is grasped and tractioned upward to bet-ter expose the infundibulopelvic ligament. The ovarian vessels in the infundibulopelvic ligament are identified, coagulated, and divided (Fig. 42a,b). The round liga-ment is coagulated and divided (Fig. 43). Traction can be placed on the uterus anteriorly with a Dermalon® 00 straight needle passed through the uterus.

T I P

The suture needle is passed through the skin in a midline point in the lower abdomen, placed through the uterus body, exited through the skin, and loosely tied externally, allowing mobiliza-tion of the uterus if necessary.

The same procedure is done on the left side.

�Pelvic�Lymphadenectomy

Pelvic lymph node dissection is bilaterally performed as described above

F I g . � 4 2

a� Infundibulopelvic�ligament.�b�Coagulation�of�infundibu-lopelvic�ligament

F I g . � 4 3

Round�ligament

Page 139: Manual of laparoscopic urology

135Laparoscopic Transperitoneal Radical CystectomyChapter 7

�Recto-Vaginal�Dissection

The initial steps of the dissection are the same as for the recto-vesical dissection in the male (see Recto-Vesical Dissection). When the posterior peritoneal incision ap-proaches the Douglas pouch, a valve is introduced into

the vagina, lifting the peritoneal fold. This maneuver will aid in the exposure and facilitate the dissection of the recto-vaginal plane (Fig. 44).

The posterior peritoneum at the level of the Douglas pouch is grasped with the bipolar grasper and placed under traction. The peritoneum is incised close to its superior deflection (Fig. 45), and the inferior peritoneal lip with fatty tissue attached is pulled down to expose the correct plane of dissection (Fig. 46).

T I P

Two planes of dissection are encountered at this level. The right one is between the fatty tissue and the vagina, and by applying downward trac-tion, the avascular plane of loose areolar tissue is exposed. The wrong plane of dissection is be-tween the fatty tissue and the rectum, and by following this plane, the chance of rectum inju-ries increases.

The vaginal wall is mobilized off the rectosigmoid colon up to the level of the canal anal, and the dissection is extended laterally to the ischiorectal fossa (Fig. 47).

F I g . � 4 4

Exposure�of�the�Douglas�cul-de-sac�(A);�Vaginal�valve�(B)

F I g . � 4 5

Peritoneal�incision�at�the�Douglas�pouch�level

F I g . � 4 6

a Correct�plane�of�dissection.�b�Wrong�plane�of�dissection

Page 140: Manual of laparoscopic urology

136 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

An incision is made at the posterior vaginal wall be-low the cervix.

T I P

Gas leakage during section of the vagina is pre-vented by packing the vagina with a surgical glove filled with gauze.

If necessary, a small portion of the cardinal ligament can be coagulated and divided to facilitate exposure.

�Division�of�the�Anterior�Branches��of�the�Hypogastric�Vessels—LigaSure�5mm

The anterior and posterior leaves of broad ligament are sharply opened and divided lateral to the uterus. The hypogastric vessels are bilaterally dissected, exposing the anterior branches. The initial arterial branch is usu-ally the superior vesical artery, which is coagulated and transected with the use of LigaSure.

T I P

LigaSure 5mm settings—III and 01/01.

The middle and inferior vesical arteries and branches of the middle hemorrhoidal artery that anastomose with the inferior vesical artery are also coagulated and tran-sected. The adventitious tissue surrounding the uterine vessels is dissected, and the vessels are coagulated and divided at the level of the lower uterine segment. The lateral vaginal wall is incised.

�Anterior�Dissection—LigaSure�5mm

Following completion of the posterior dissection, the anterior dissection is initiated and is analogous to the anterior dissection in the male cystectomy.

T I P

The bladder is filled with 200 mL of saline to fa-cilitate the initial dissection.

The peritoneum cephalad to the bladder and inferior to the umbilicus is incised transversally with LigaSure, and the urachus (median umbilical ligament) and the oblit-erated umbilical artery (medial umbilical ligament) are identified and divided. The inverted U-shaped perito-neal incision extends along each side of the bladder, ex-posing the already transected round ligaments (exposed during lymphadenectomy). The bladder is emptied, and the plane between the prevesical fat and the anterior abdominal wall is developed (Retzius space), exposing the endopelvic fascia bilaterally. The endopelvic fascia is opened, allowing the dissection to be continued to the lateral aspects of the urethra. If a urethrectomy is to be performed, the pubovesical suspensory ligaments are identified and divided (these are analogous to the pu-boprostatic ligaments in the male). The division of the pubovesical ligaments allows the urethra and bladder to drop inferiorly. The deep dorsal vein of the clitoris is identified, ligated with Polysorb 0 CL 802 (needle ½ 40 mm) and divided. The urethra is then dissected from

F I g . � 4 7

Left�levator�ani�muscle�(A);�Rectum�(B);�Suction�device�(S)�at�the�inferior�part�of�the�dissection

Page 141: Manual of laparoscopic urology

137Laparoscopic Transperitoneal Radical CystectomyChapter 7

the dorsal vein of the clitoris, so the only remaining at-tachments of the specimen are the urethral meatus and a small portion of the anterior vaginal wall. The urethra is then ligated with Polysorb 0 CL 802 and divided fol-lowing removal of the bladder catheter. The ovaries, fal-lopian tubes, uterus, and cervix are left attached by only a small portion of the anterior vagina that is now excised en bloc with the specimen.

T I P

If a continent orthotopic diversion is being con-sidered, only the bladder neck and the initial 1 cm of urethra are removed; minimal urethral mobilization is performed distal to the urethro-vesical junction. The exact location of the blad-der neck is defined by in and out movements of the Foley catheter balloon, and the urethra is sharply transected at the level of the bladder neck or just distal to it. Full-thickness urethral margin biopsies are sent for frozen section.

A transvaginal approach is used if urethrectomy is to be performed. A retractor spreads the labia, and the exter-nal urethral meatus is encircled with an electrocautery knife. The entire specimen is removed transvaginally, and the vagina is laparoscopically closed with a running Vicryl 0 suture in either a posteroanterior or a vertical plane, depending on the amount of vagina left. Careful hemostasis is performed, and a silicone Penrose drain is placed at the end of the procedure.

�The�Urinary�Diversion

The technique of urinary diversion for males is also used for the female radical cystectomy.

�Postoperative�Considerations

Patients are usually monitored in the intensive care unit for vital parameters and adequate pain manage-ment during the first 24 h following the procedure or until stable. Parenteral nutrition is continued until oral feeding is resumed. Early assisted ambulation is imple-mented. Drains stay in place until secretions drop below 50 mL and the ureteral stents (in an ileal loop diversion) are removed around day 14 after surgery. Normal activ-ity is resumed four weeks after the procedure.

�Suggested�Readings

Haber GP, Gill IS: Laparoscopic radical cystectomy for can-cer: oncological outcomes at up to 5 years. BJU Int 2007 Jul; 100(1):137–142.Gerullis H, Kuemmel C: Laparoscopic cystectomy with ex-tracorporeal-assisted urinary diversion: experience with 34 patients. Eur Urol 2007 Jan; 51(1):193–198.Cathelineau X, Jaffe J: Laparoscopic radical cystectomy with urinary diversion: what is the optimal technique? Curr Opin Urol 2007 Mar; 17(2):93–97.Simonato A, Gregori A: Laparoscopic radical cystopros-tatectomy: our experience in a consecutive series of 10 patients with a 3 years follow-up. Eur Urol 2005 Jun; 47(6):785–790; discussion 790–792.Cathelineau X, Arroyo C: Laparoscopic assisted radical cys-tectomy: the Montsouris experience after 84 cases. Eur Urol 2005 Jun; 47(6):780–784.Moinzadeh A, Gill IS: Laparoscopic radical cystectomy in the female. J Urol 2005 Jun; 173(6):1912–1917.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Page 142: Manual of laparoscopic urology

Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

Section III

Page 143: Manual of laparoscopic urology

�Introduction

Prostate cancer patients with a serum PSA level of less than 10 ng/mL, a Gleason sum under 7, and a clinical stage under T2c are at low risk for pelvic nodal meta-static involvement and do not require a pelvic lymph node dissection. However, for patients with a moderate to high risk, a pelvic lymph node dissection should be performed in order to improve progression-free sur-vival.

The anatomical lymphatic drainage of the prostate includes the obturator fossa, the external iliac, and the hypogastric artery. Laparoscopic standard lymph node dissection (obturator and internal and external iliac nodes) obtains a higher total nodal count than the modi-fied pelvic lymph node dissection limited to the external iliac nodes or obturator fossa. It can be performed at the same time of the definitive surgery through a transperi-toneal laparoscopic approach. This minimally invasive operative procedure is safe, with results and morbidity equivalent to those of open surgery.

Radical cystectomy with bilateral pelvic lymph node dis-section is a standard treatment for high-grade, muscle-invasive bladder cancer. Important prognostic variables in patients with pathologic evidence of lymph node metastases are the extent of the primary bladder tumor (p stage), the number of lymph nodes removed, and the lymph node tumor burden. Although the proximal limits of the lymph node dissection remain to be better defined, selected patients with localized bladder tumor and low volume, microscopic lymph node disease can be cured with radical cystectomy and lymphadenectomy.

Laparoscopic Pelvic Lymph Node Dissection

Chapter 8

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . 140 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . 140 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

�Veress�Needle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140�First�Port�(11�mm,�optic�0°) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142�Second�Port�(11�mm,�bipolar�grasper) . . . . . . 142�Third�Port�(5�mm,�suction�device) . . . . . . . . . . . 142�Fourth�Port�(5�mm,�monopolar�round-tipped�scissors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Surgical Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142�Transperitoneal�Pelvic�Lymph�Node��Dissection�for�Bladder�Cancer� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143�Transperitoneal�Pelvic�Lymph�Node��Dissection�for�Prostate�Cancer� . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

�Lymphadenectomy�for�Bladder�Cancer . . . . . 148�Lymphadenectomy�for�Prostate�Cancer . . . . . 149

Page 144: Manual of laparoscopic urology

140 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

�Preoperative�Preparation

This procedure is usually performed at the time of trans-peritoneal laparoscopic radical prostatectomy or trans-peritoneal laparoscopic cystectomy. Before a patient consents to the procedures, it is important to discuss the specific risks of the surgery, including the potential need to convert to the traditional open operation if difficul-ties arise.

The patient is admitted to the hospital the night be-fore the surgery for bowel preparation as for laparo-scopic radical prostatectomy (see Chap. 6) or laparo-scopic radical cystectomy (see Chap. 7). Fasting starts at midnight before surgery. Thromboprophylaxis is implemented with good hydration, placement of com-pressive elastic stockings on the lower extremities, and low-molecular-weight heparin. Enoxaparin (Clex-ane®, Lovenox®) 40 mg sc 1 × day or nadroparin (Flaxi-parine®, Fraxiparin®) 0.6 mL sc 1 × day is initiated on day 1 after the surgery and continued daily until the pa-tient is discharged from the hospital. In selected cases, the treatment is continued for 30 days after the proce-dure.

T I P

Thromboprophylaxis is important due to the concurrent risk factors of laparoscopy, cancer, and pelvic surgery.

Patients also receive antibiotic prophylaxis with a single preoperative dose of intravenous second-generation cephalosporin, unless they are allergic to penicillin. Blood type and crossmatch are determined.

�Patient�Positioning�and�Initial��Preparation

The surgery is performed under general anesthesia. The base of the table must be positioned below the patient’s hip to avoid elevation of the abdomen while in the Tren-delenburg position. The patient is placed in the supine position with the lower limbs in abduction, allowing the laparoscopic cart to be moved closer to the surgeon and intraoperative access to the perineum. The lower

buttocks must be placed at the distal end of the operat-ing table. The upper limbs are positioned alongside the body to avoid the risk of stretch injuries to the brachial plexus and to allow for free movements of the operative team. A nasogastric catheter is placed by the anesthesi-ologist and the stomach decompressed to avoid punc-ture during trocar placement. The abdomen, pelvis, and genitalia are skin prepared in case conversion to an open procedure is required. An 18Fr Foley catheter with 10 mL in the balloon is introduced after the placement of the sterile drapes.

The surgeon operates from the patient’s left side, and the first assistant is placed at the opposite side of the sur-geon. The laparoscopic cart is placed at the patient’s feet, while the instruments table and the coagulation unit are positioned at the left side of the patient.

�Trocars�and�Laparoscopic�Instruments�

2 × 11 mm (optic 0° and bipolar grasper) 2 × 5 mm (scissors and suction device)

T I P

3 × 5 mm for transperitoneal laparoscopic radi-cal prostatectomy

Monopolar round-tipped scissors, bipolar grasper, 5-mm suction device, needle drivers (2), and 10-mm laparoscopic optic 0°

�Access�and�Port�Placement

See Figures 1 and 2.

�Veress�Needle

A midline cutaneous incision superior to the umbilicus is made for bladder cancer lymphadenectomy and at the inferior and right margin of the umbilicus for prostate cancer lymphadenectomy.

The Veress needle is introduced through the incision (see Chap. 1, Veress Needle Introduction).

••

Page 145: Manual of laparoscopic urology

141Laparoscopic Pelvic Lymph Node DissectionChapter 8

F I g . � 2

Lymph� node� dissection� for� prostate� cancer� (This� figure� was� published� in� Wein:� Campbell-Walsh� Urology,� 9th� ed.,� Copyright�Elsevier)

F I g . � 1

Lymph� node� dissection� for� bladder� cancer� (This� figure� was� published� in� Wein:� Campbell-Walsh� Urology,� 9th� ed.,� Copyright�Elsevier)

Page 146: Manual of laparoscopic urology

142 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

The insufflation line is connected to the Veress nee-dle, the stopcock is opened, and insufflation is initiated.

T I P

It is recommended to start with low flow to avoid damage to a vital structure in case the needle is malpositioned. Switch to high flow if the pres-sure of insufflation is increasing at a steady and normal level and there is also a tympanic per-cussion of the liver area.

�First�Port�(11�mm,�optic�0°)

Once pneumoperitoneum is established, the Veress needle is removed, and the 11-mm trocar is introduced through the same incision, perpendicularly to the ab-dominal wall. The optic is placed through the trocar, and the insufflation tubing is connected to it.

�Second�Port�(11�mm,�bipolar�grasper)

A cutaneous incision is made 2 cm medial and superior to the left anterior superior iliac spine for introduction of the 11-mm trocar.

�Third�Port�(5�mm,�suction�device)

A cutaneous incision is made 2 cm medial and superior to the right anterior superior iliac spine for introduction of the 5-mm trocar.

�Fourth�Port��(5�mm,�monopolar�round-tipped�scissors)

For insertion of the 5-mm trocar, a cutaneous incision is made at a point situated at the junction of the lateral 2/3 and medial 1/3 distance between the right anterior superior iliac spine trocar and the umbilicus trocar.

T I P

Pay attention to the epigastric vessels, which can be visualized by pressing the right lateral part of the abdomen.

The operating table is moved down and backward, and the patient is placed in an extended Trendelenburg po-sition. Steps are placed under the surgeon, and the bi-polar and monopolar pedals are placed over the step. The surgeon, positioned higher than the assistant can then use the working instruments (bipolar grasper and monopolar scissors) without being restrained by the assistant holding the optic in the upper midline posi-tion.

�Surgical�Technique

The intestine is positioned above the promontory by gently pushing back the loops of the small bowel with the aid of the Trendelenburg position. If necessary, the cecum is dissected off the posterior peritoneum to in-crease its mobility and assist in the cranial displacement of the small bowel. To facilitate the left-side dissection, the sigmoid and its mesocolon are laterally displaced and fixed to the abdominal wall using a monofilament 2-0 straight needle suture.

T I P

The suture needle is passed through the skin at a point lateral and cranial to the left port, placed through the appendices epiploicae of the sigmoid colon, and exited close to the entrance point. It is held in place by a Kocher clamp.

The fixation has to be released for the left pelvic wall dis-section.

Page 147: Manual of laparoscopic urology

143Laparoscopic Pelvic Lymph Node DissectionChapter 8

�Transperitoneal�Pelvic�Lymph�Node�Dissection�for�Bladder�Cancer�

A standard pelvic lymphadenectomy is bilaterally per-formed, using a “split and roll” technique. Dissecting the lymphatic package upward, from the junction of the femoral canal up to the level of the bifurcation of the

common iliac artery, allows for an avascular plane of dissection and facilitates the laparoscopic maneuvers.

T I P

Due to technical ease, right-handed surgeons begin the dissection with the right side of the lymphadenectomy.

A posterior peritoneal incision is made over the right common iliac artery, and the medial peritoneal leaf is lifted to better expose the artery (Fig. 3).

T I P

It is important to always place traction on the peritoneum to facilitate dissection.

The incision follows the artery caudally to a point just lateral to the medial umbilical ligament (obliterated umbilical artery), at the level of the crossing of the vas deferens (round ligament in female patients) (Fig. 4); cranially, the incision extends to the common iliac ar-tery (Fig. 5).

F I g . � 3

Posterior� peritoneal� (P)� incision� over� common� iliac�artery�(A)

F I g . � 4

Peritoneal�incision�extends�to�obliterated�umbilical�artery

F I g . � 5

Right�iliac�artery�exposed

Page 148: Manual of laparoscopic urology

144 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

The ureters are bilaterally dissected, clipped, and displaced upward. In women, the infundibulopelvic ligament, along with the ovarian vessels, has been pre-viously ligated and divided (see Chap. 7). The gonadal vessels are laterally displaced and preserved in the male,

and the vas deferens (round ligament) is coagulated and transected (Fig. 6).

The genitofemoral nerve, which is the lateral limit of the node dissection, should be identified and preserved as it courses over the right iliopsoas muscle. The right external iliac vessels are medially retracted, and the fas-cia overlying the muscle is incised medial to the nerve. The fibroareolar tissue is lifted off the surface of the muscle and is swept medially towards the iliac vessels.

The fibroareolar and lymphatic tissue anterior to the right external iliac artery is longitudinally divided using the monopolar scissors, and the tissue is dissected from the artery at its lateral and medial aspect. The same dis-section is performed on the right external iliac vein.

T I P

The external iliac vein appears flat at the stan-dard pneumoperitoneum pressure (12 mmHg). To improve visualization, the pressure can be decreased to allow re-distention of the vessel (Fig.7).

The dissection is then carried down behind the iliac vessels to free the lateral and medial component at-

F I g . � 6

Left�vas�(V)�is�coagulated�and�transected,�and�gonadal�ves-sels�(G)�are�laterally�displaced�

F I g . � 7

“Flat”�iliac�vein�(V)

F I g . � 8

Dissected�tissue�(LT)�is�swept�over�the�psoas�(P)�to�the�ob-turator�fossa;�Iliac�vein�(V)

Page 149: Manual of laparoscopic urology

145Laparoscopic Pelvic Lymph Node DissectionChapter 8

tached at their base. The vessels are carefully displaced laterally, and the lateral component of the fibroareolar and lymphatic tissue is swept under the vessels and along the psoas muscle and pelvic sidewall to the obtu-rator fossa (Fig. 8).

At the caudal limit of the dissection, in the angle be-tween Cooper’s ligament and the inferior aspect of the external iliac vein (Fig. 9), the nodal package is double-clipped (Ligaclip II ML) and transected to reduce the occurrence of lymphocele (Fig. 10).

T I P

The node of Cloquet, representing the distal limit of the dissection at this level, is dissected at the junction of the femoral canal (Fig. 11).

A circumflex iliac vein usually runs to the external iliac vein at this location, and it can be ligated and divided if necessary.

The obturator nerve is visualized deep to the external iliac vein (Fig. 12), and the lymphatic package is then carefully mobilized off the obturator neurovascular bundle.

T I P

Care must be taken not to injure the obturator nerve (Fig. 13a,b).

F I g . � 9

Caudal�limit�of�the�dissection�

F I g . � 1 0

Clip�at�nodal�package

F I g . � 1 1

Node� of� Cloquet� (C);� Accessory� obturator� vein� (V)� under�the�node

Page 150: Manual of laparoscopic urology

146 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

The dissection at this level is bordered by the obliterated umbilical artery and lateral bladder wall, which is the medial limit of the dissection. Small lymphatic vessels are clipped with Ligaclip II ML.

The dissection progresses cephalad to the bifurcation of the iliac vessels, and the hypogastric artery, which

is the posterior limit of the dissection, is visualized (Fig. 14).

T I P

For an extended lymphadenectomy, the superior limit of the dissection is the inferior mesenteric artery, and the dissection extends laterally over the inferior vena cava. The fibroareolar and lymphatic tissue is dissected caudally off the aorta, vena cava, and common iliac vessels over the sacral promontory.

The lymphatic tissue is gently stripped of the hypogas-tric artery (Fig. 15), and care must be taken not to injure the hypogastric vein (Fig. 16).

The dissected package is then clipped (XL Hem-o-lok clips) and transected. The specimen is removed through the left 11-mm port after being placed into a bag (Endo-Catch). The same dissection is done on the left side.

F I g . � 1 2

Obturator�nerve� (N)�visualized�medial� to�the�external� iliac�vein�(V);�Lymphatic�tissue�(LT)

F I g . � 1 3

a�Obturator�fossa.�b�Obturator�artery�and�nerve

Page 151: Manual of laparoscopic urology

147Laparoscopic Pelvic Lymph Node DissectionChapter 8

�Transperitoneal�Pelvic�Lymph�Node�Dissection�for�Prostate�Cancer�

A standard pelvic lymphadenectomy is bilaterally per-formed using a “split and roll” technique. A posterior peritoneal incision is made over the right common iliac artery, and the medial peritoneal leaf is lifted to better expose the artery (Fig. 3).

T I P

It is important to always place traction on the peritoneum to facilitate dissection.

The incision follows the artery caudally to a point just medial to the medial umbilical ligament (obliterated umbilical artery), at the level of the crossing of the vas deferens (Fig. 4). Cranially, the incision extends to the bifurcation of the iliac vessels (cephalad limit of the dis-section) (Fig. 5). The ureter is exposed at the location where it crosses the iliac artery, and it is then medially displaced together with the medial leaf of the posterior peritoneum.

The gonadal vessels are laterally displaced and pre-served, and the vas deferens is coagulated and tran-sected (Fig. 6).

The genitofemoral nerve, which is the lateral limit of the node dissection, should be identified and preserved as it courses over the right iliopsoas muscle. The right external iliac vessels are medially retracted, and the fas-

F I g . � 1 4

Hypogastric�artery

F I g . � 1 5

Hypogastric�artery�dissected

F I g . � 1 6

Hypogastric� vein� (Hy);� Obturator� vein� (V);� Nerve� (N);�Artery�(A)

Page 152: Manual of laparoscopic urology

148 Section II Laparoscopic Surgery for Malignant Urological Disorders

cia overlying the muscle is incised medial to the nerve. The fibroareolar tissue is lifted off the surface of the muscle and is swept medially towards the iliac vessels.

The fibroareolar and lymphatic tissue anterior to the right external iliac artery is longitudinally divided using the monopolar scissors, and the tissue is dissected from the artery at its lateral and medial aspect.

The same dissection is performed on the right exter-nal iliac vein.

T I P

The external iliac vein appears flat at the stan-dard pneumoperitoneum pressure (12 mmHg). To improve visualization, the pressure can be decreased to allow re-distention of the vessel (Fig. 7).

The dissection is then carried down behind the iliac ves-sels to free the lateral and medial component attached at their base. The vessels are carefully displaced later-ally, and the lateral component of the fibroareolar and lymphatic tissue is swept under the vessels and along the psoas muscle and pelvic sidewall to the obturator fossa (Fig. 8).

At the caudal limit of the dissection, in the angle be-tween Cooper’s ligament and the inferior aspect of the external iliac vein (Fig. 9), the nodal package is double-clipped (Ligaclip II ML) and transected to reduce the occurrence of lymphocele (Fig. 10).

T I P

The node of Cloquet, representing the distal limit of the dissection at this level, is dissected at the junction of the femoral canal (Fig. 11).

A circumflex iliac vein usually runs to the external iliac vein at this location, and it can be ligated and divided if necessary.

The obturator nerve is visualized deep to the external iliac vein (Fig. 12), and the lymphatic package is then

carefully mobilized off the obturator neurovascular bundle.

T I P

Care must be taken not to injure the obturator nerve (Fig 13a,b).

The dissection at this level is bordered by the obliterated umbilical artery, which is the medial limit of the dissec-tion and should be preserved. Small lymphatic vessels are clipped with Ligaclip II ML.

The dissection progresses cephalad to the bifurcation of the iliac vessels, and the hypogastric artery, which is the posterior limit of the dissection, is visualized (Fig. 14). The lymphatic tissue is gently stripped of the hypogastric artery (Fig. 15), and care must be taken not to injure the hypogastric vein (Fig. 16).

The dissected package is then clipped (XL Hem-o-lok clips) and transected. The specimen is removed through the left 11-mm port after being placed into a bag (Endo-Catch). The same dissection is done on the left side.

�Postoperative�Considerations

After surgery, the patient should be treated as described in Chaps. 6 and 7.

�Suggested�Readings

�Lymphadenectomy�for�Bladder�Cancer

Haber GP, Gill IS: Laparoscopic radical cystectomy for can-cer: oncological outcomes at up to 5 years. BJU Int 2007 Jul; 100(1):137–142.Stein JP, Penson DF: Radical cystectomy with extended lymphadenectomy: evaluating separate package versus en bloc submission for node positive bladder cancer. J Urol 2007 Nov; 52(5):1347–55.Stein JP: Lymphadenectomy in bladder cancer: how high is “high enough”? Urol Oncol 2006 Jul–Aug; 24(4):349–355.

1.

2.

3.

Page 153: Manual of laparoscopic urology

149Laparoscopic Pelvic Lymph Node DissectionChapter 8

Finelli A, Gill IS: Laparoscopic extended pelvic lymphad-enectomy for bladder cancer: technique and initial out-comes. J Urol 2004 Nov; 172(5 Pt 1):1809–1812.Stein JP, Skinner DG: The role of lymphadenectomy in high-grade invasive bladder cancer. Urol Clin North Am 2005 May; 32(2):187–197.Bochner BH, Herr HW: Impact of separate versus en bloc pelvic lymph node dissection on the number of lymph nodes retrieved in cystectomy specimens. J Urol 2001 Dec; 166(6):2295–2296.Vieweg J, Gschwend JE: Pelvic lymph node dissection can be curative in patients with node positive bladder cancer. J Urol 1999 Feb; 161(2):449–454.

4.

5.

6.

7.

�Lymphadenectomy�for�Prostate�Cancer

Heidenreich A, Ohlmann CH: Anatomical extent of pelvic lymphadenectomy in patients undergoing radical prosta-tectomy. Eur Urol 2007 Jul; 52(1):29–37.Lattouf JB, Beri A: Laparoscopic extended pelvic lymph node dissection for prostate cancer: description of the surgical technique and initial results. Eur Urol 2007 Nov; 52(5):1347–55.Touijer K, Rabbani F: Standard vs limited pelvic lymph node dissection for prostate cancer in patients with a pre-dicted probability of nodal metastasis greater than 1%. J Urol 2007 July; 178(1):120–124.Wyler SF, Sulser T: Laparoscopic extended pelvic lymph node dissection for high-risk prostate cancer. Urology 2006 Oct; 68(4):883–887.Häcker A, Jeschke S: Detection of pelvic lymph node me-tastases in patients with clinically localized prostate can-cer: comparison of [18F] fluorocholine positron emission tomography-computerized tomography and laparoscopic radioisotope guided sentinel lymph node dissection. J Urol 2006 Nov; 176(5):2014–8; discussion 2018–2019.Stone NN, Stock RG: Laparoscopic pelvic lymph node dis-section for prostate cancer: comparison of the extended and modified techniques. J Urol 1997 Nov; 158(5):1891–1894.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Page 154: Manual of laparoscopic urology

�Introduction

Open pyeloplasty, once the reference standard for the correction of ureteropelvic junction (UPJ) obstruction, has fallen out of favor despite long-term success rates due to the postoperative morbidity associated with open flank surgery. Laparoscopic dismembered flap pyelo-plasty is now a viable alternative for patients with UPJ obstruction, with the benefits of shorter hospital stays, reduced postoperative pain, and faster convalescence. The laparoscopic approach is capable of addressing vari-ous clinical situations of UPJ obstruction, and depend-ing on expertise level, has proved to be equally effica-cious in treating scarred, obstructed UPJ that had failed open surgery.

�Preoperative�Preparation

Before a patient consents to a laparoscopic pyeloplasty, it is important to discuss the specific risks of the surgery, including the potential need to convert to the traditional open operation if difficulties arise.

The patient is admitted to the hospital the day before the surgery for bowel preparation, which includes 2 L of Colopeg® (1 envelope/L) p.o. and a Fleet® enema. Fasting starts at midnight before surgery. Patients also receive antibiotic prophylaxis with a single preoperative dose of intravenous second-generation cephalosporin, unless they are allergic to penicillin. Blood type and crossmatch are determined.

Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Pyeloplasty

Chapter 9

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . 154 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . 154 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

�Veress�Needle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155�First�Port�(11�mm,�optic�0°) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157�Second�Port�(5�mm,�monopolar��round-tipped�scissors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157�Third�Port�(11�mm,�bipolar�grasper) . . . . . . . . . 158�Fourth�Port�(5�mm,�suction�device) . . . . . . . . . 158�Final�Position�of�the�Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Surgical Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158�Colon�Mobilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158�Identification�of�the�Ureter�and�Ureteropelvic�Junction�(UPJ) . . . . . . . . . . . 159�Ureteral�Transection/Renal�Pelvis�Excision . . 160�Anastomosis� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160�Stenting� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Page 155: Manual of laparoscopic urology

154 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

�Patient�Positioning�and�Initial�Preparation�

The patient is initially positioned supine for intravenous access, the induction of general anesthesia, and endotra-cheal intubation. An orogastric tube is placed and the stomach decompressed to avoid puncture during trocar placement and to allow additional space during abdom-inal insufflation. An 18Fr Foley catheter with 10 mL in the balloon is introduced for decompression of the blad-der. During skin preparation, the entire flank and abdo-men are included in case conversion to an open proce-dure is required. The umbilicus is placed over the break in the operating table, and the patient is positioned in a modified lateral decubitus position.

T I P

For left-side pyeloplasty, the patient is placed in a strict lateral decubitus position.

The table can be flexed as needed or an inflatable bal-loon is positioned under the patient at the level of the umbilicus. Padding is used to support the buttocks and torso, and all potential pressure points are cushioned.

An axillary roll is placed to prevent brachial plexus in-jury, and the arms are positioned as far away from the trunk as possible so as not to disturb the movement of the operative team. The patient is held in position with strips of cloth tape (Fig. 1a,b).

The surgeon operates from the abdominal side of the patient, and the first assistant is placed caudally to the surgeon. The laparoscopic cart is positioned at the back of the patient’s chest, with the operative team facing the video monitor. The instruments table is positioned be-hind the operative team, and the assistant is positioned higher than the surgeon to prevent instruments from conflicting (Fig. 2a–c).

�Trocars�and�Laparoscopic�Instruments�

Right-side pyeloplasty: 2 × 11 mm (optic 0° and bipolar grasper) 3 × 5 mm (monopolar scissors, suction device, and liver retractor grasper)

Left-side pyeloplasty: 2 × 11 mm (optic 0° and bipolar grasper) 2 × 5 mm (monopolar scissors and suction device)

••

••

F I g . � 1

a�Patient�position.�b�Padding

Page 156: Manual of laparoscopic urology

155Transperitoneal Laparoscopic PyeloplastyChapter 9

Monopolar round-tipped scissors, bipolar grasper, liver retractor grasper, 5-mm suction device, needle drivers (2), and 10-mm laparoscopic optic 0°

�Access�and�Port�Placement

Four ports are generally enough to perform the proce-dure, although a fifth port may be used for liver retrac-tion in those cases of secondary reconstruction with long length of proximal ureteral stenosis, where the right kidney must be fully mobilized (Fig. 3). Before the introduction of the trocars, the abdomen is insufflated using a Veress needle.

• T I P

In case of previous surgery, the Veress needle is not inserted, and an open access procedure is done for the placement of the first trocar.

�Veress�Needle

A cutaneous incision is made two fingerbreadths below the costal margin arch in the midaxillary line, lateral to the ipsilateral rectus muscle (see Chap. 1, Veress Needle

F I g . � 2

a� Patient� and� laparoscopic� cart.� b� Steps� below� assistant.�c�Instruments�table�behind�operative�team

Page 157: Manual of laparoscopic urology

156 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

F I g . � 3

Access�and�port�placement�(This�figure�was�published�in�Wein:�Campbell-Walsh�Urology,�9th�ed.,�Copyright�Elsevier)

F I g . � 4

a�Veress�needle�at�the�costal�margin�arch.�b�Veress�needle�inserted

Page 158: Manual of laparoscopic urology

157Transperitoneal Laparoscopic PyeloplastyChapter 9

Introduction). The needle is introduced through the in-cision (Fig. 4a,b).

T I P

The skin incision should be 50% larger than the diameter of the 11-mm trocar.

�First�Port�(11�mm,�optic�0°)

Once pneumoperitoneum is established, the Veress needle is removed, and the 11-mm trocar is introduced through the same incision, perpendicularly to the ab-dominal wall (Fig. 5).

T I P

Pneumoperitoneum is established with an intra-abdominal pressure higher than 10 mmHg.

The optic is introduced through the device, and the ab-domen is then inspected for any injury due to insertion of the Veress needle or the trocar, and to identify adhe-sions in areas where the secondary ports will be placed. The insufflator line is then connected to the trocar.

�Second�Port�(5�mm,��monopolar�round-tipped�scissors)

The triangulation rule must be followed for the place-ment of the trocars as the body habitus is different for each patient. Four fingerbreadths should be between the optic trocar and the working trocars (Fig. 6), and five fingerbreadths should be between the working trocars (Fig. 7a,b).

T I P

The 5-mm port is usually reserved for the most skilled hand, as the movements of the working instruments inside the smaller ports must be precise.

F I g . � 5

Perpendicular�introduction�of�the�trocar

F I g . � 6

Triangulation�rule,�four�fingers

Page 159: Manual of laparoscopic urology

158 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

�Third�Port�(11�mm,�bipolar�grasper)

The triangulation rule must be followed as above (Fig. 7a,b).

�Fourth�Port�(5�mm,�suction�device)

A cutaneous incision is made approximately midline

between the umbilicus trocar and the anterior superior iliac spine on the side of the procedure for the introduc-tion of the 5-mm trocar.

�Final�Position�of�the�Ports

The ports are tied to the skin with Vicryl 2-0 to prevent accidental removal.

�Surgical�Technique

�Colon�Mobilization

A traditional Anderson-Hynes dismembered pyelo-plasty is the usual preferred technique for patients who have a large renal pelvis, a high ureteral insertion, or a posterior crossing vessel at the ureteropelvic junction. For a left pyeloplasty, the plane between the descending colon and the underlying Gerota’s fascia is developed to allow the colon to fall medially (Fig. 9a,b). On the right, the ascending colon is mobilized and dissected from the underlying Gerota’s fascia.

F I g . � 7

a�Triangulation�rule,�five�fingers.�b�Ports�in�place

F I g . � 8

Left-side�ports�in�position

Page 160: Manual of laparoscopic urology

159Transperitoneal Laparoscopic PyeloplastyChapter 9

T I P

The lateral attachments of the kidney to the ab-dominal wall should not be freed at this time to avoid the kidney falling medially into the oper-ating field.

T I P

In thin patients, a transmesocolic approach can be used, and the colon is not mobilized.

Colon mobilization continues caudally to the common iliac vessels.

�Identification�of�the�Ureter�and�Ureteropelvic�Junction�(UPJ)

Gerota’s fascia is carefully incised at the level of the lower pole of the kidney for the dissection of the ure-teropelvic junction and potential associated crossing vessels. Otherwise, the ureter can be searched inferior

to the lower pole of the kidney and followed to the ure-teropelvic junction. The Gerota’s fatty tissue at the level of the lower pole is incised and lifted to locate the psoas muscle.

T I P

The correct maneuver to expose the psoas muscle is the continuous upper movement of the laparo-scopic instruments to lift the fatty tissue.

The psoas is followed to expose the gonadal vessels and the ureter just lateral and deep to these vessels.

T I P

In case of previous surgery or difficulty in find-ing the ureter, it should be dissected in a lower location.

The ureter is carefully dissected from the gonadal ves-sels, and attachments between these structures are re-leased with the aid of monopolar scissors.

F I g . � 9

a�Colon�adhesions�to�peritoneum.�b�Plane�between�colon�and�Gerota’s�fascia

Page 161: Manual of laparoscopic urology

160 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

T I P

The ureteral blood supply is usually anteromedi-ally located in the proximal third, medially lo-cated in the middle third, and laterally located in the distal third.

The ureter is then lifted and, along with the visualization of the psoas muscle, followed cranially to the lower pole and to the ureteropelvic junction.

�Ureteral�Transection/Renal�Pelvis�Excision

Following identification of the ureteropelvic pathol-ogy, the pelvic junction and the renal pelvis are care-fully dissected to allow mobilization of these structures (Fig. 10).

After determining that there is adequate ureteral length for the anastomosis, the ureter is transected close to the UPJ. The ureteropelvic junction is incised, and the redundant renal pelvis is diagonally excised from its lat-eral side (Fig. 11a–c).

T I P

Care must be taken not to excise too much renal pelvis, especially when resecting along its lateral aspect to avoid anastomosis tension.

The ureter wall is opened longitudinally and spatulated for about 1.5 to 2.0 cm along its lateral margin (Fig. 12).

T I P

If no urine exits from the proximal end of the transected ureter, an intrinsically related prob-lem is the most likely cause of the UPJ stenosis.

�Anastomosis�

After proper alignment of the ureter and renal pelvis, the first Vicryl 4-0 suture is placed through the apex of the “V” in the spatulated ureter and through the tip of the inferior renal pelvic flap (Fig. 13a,b).

T I P

The suture is placed from the outside of the lu-men of the ureter to the inside of the lumen of the renal pelvis.

Tying of the first suture advances and reduces the ten-sion on the anastomosis.

T I P

In case of anastomosis tension, the ureter can be further freed distally to allow for cranial mobi-lization.

The needle is then passed under the ureter to perform the posterior side of the anastomosis.

F I g . � 1 0

Pelvic�junction�and�crossing�vessel

Page 162: Manual of laparoscopic urology

161Transperitoneal Laparoscopic PyeloplastyChapter 9

F I g . � 1 1

a� Ureteropelvic� junction� incision.� b� Redundant� pelvis� di-agonally�incised.�c�Redundant�pelvis�excised

F I g . � 1 2

Ureteral�spatulation�along�lateral�margin

Page 163: Manual of laparoscopic urology

162 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

T I P

The backside of the needle is passed first when moving the needle under the ureter to perform the posterior side of the anastomosis.

A watertight running suture is done following a cepha-lad course.

T I P

The initial suture at the renal pelvis is placed from the outside to the inside of the lumen; the suture is then introduced from the inside of the lumen of the ureter and again to the outside of the lumen of the renal pelvis (Fig. 14). To avoid the crossing of the suture during this stage, the standing part of the thread is positioned in the center of the anastomosis facing the renal pelvis.

After completing the posterior anastomosis (Fig. 15), the knot is tied, and a double J stent is introduced.

�Stenting�

A straight tip guide wire introduced through the work-ing 11-mm port is inserted into the ureter and down to the bladder (Fig. 16). A 7Fr double-pigtail stent (26–30 cm long) is placed in an antegrade fashion over the

F I g . � 1 3

a�Suture�placed�at�ureter.�b�Initial�ureteropelvic�suture

F I g . � 1 4

Posterior�side�of�the�anastomosis

Page 164: Manual of laparoscopic urology

163Transperitoneal Laparoscopic PyeloplastyChapter 9

guide wire into the bladder, and following removal of the guide wire, the proximal part of the stent is placed into the renal pelvis (Fig. 17).

T I P

The guide wire and the proximal ureter should be aligned along the same axis to facilitate wire introduction.

T I P

Approximation of the 11-mm port close to the lumen of the ureter facilitates stent introduction. The visualization of a reflux of methylene blue instilled into the bladder at the ureterotomy site can be used to verify the correct placement of the stent in the bladder.

Alternatively, a nephroureteral catheter is inserted ret-rogradely through a thin renal parenchyma overlying a calyx and is exteriorized while the distal part is inserted into the ureter.

The anterior anastomosis is then performed (Fig. 18). A watertight cranially oriented running suture is placed from the outside of the lumen of the renal pelvis to the

F I g . � 1 5

Posterior�anastomosis�completed

F I g . � 1 6

Guide�wire�inserted

F I g . � 1 7

Proximal�part�of�stent�placed�into�the�renal�pelvis

Page 165: Manual of laparoscopic urology

164 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

inside of the lumen of the ureter, and the knot is tied (Fig. 19).

A Penrose drain is introduced through the 11-mm port, positioned adjacent to the repair, and exited through the most caudal port. The aponeurosis of the 11-mm port is closed with a Dexon II HGU-46 su-ture, and the skin is closed with running intradermic Monocryl 3-0. The drain is fixed to the skin with Flex-idene 2-0, and the skin incisions are closed with Opsite® dressing.

�Postoperative�Considerations

A short hospitalization is associated with laparoscopic pyeloplasty. The Foley catheter is removed on the sec-ond postoperative day, and the Penrose drain is usually removed before discharge. The double-J stent is left in-dwelling for six weeks, and objective assessment of the repair is done with diuretic nuclear renography after a three months’ follow-up.

F I g . � 1 8

Anterior�anastomosis

�Suggested�Readings

Williams B, Tareen B: Pathophysiology and treatment of ureteropelvic junction obstruction. Curr Urol Rep 2007 Mar; 8(2):111–117.Stein RJ, Gill IS: Comparison of surgical approaches to ureteropelvic junction obstruction: endopyeloplasty versus endopyelotomy versus laparoscopic pyeloplasty. Curr Urol Rep 2007 Mar; 8(2):140–149.Castillo OA, Vitagliano G: Transmesocolic pyeloplasty: ex-perience of a single center. J Endourol 2007 Apr; 21(4): 415–418. Simforoosh N: Laparoscopic management of ureteropelvic junction obstruction by division of anterior crossing vein and cephalad relocation of anterior crossing artery. J En-dourol 2005 Sep; 19(7): 827–830.

1.

2.

3.

4.

F I g . � 1 9

Final�result

Page 166: Manual of laparoscopic urology

�Introduction

Laparoscopic living donor nephrectomy has become the standard procedure for renal transplantation. The lapa-roscopic technique is less invasive for the donor, allow-ing lower postoperative analgesic requirements and a faster return to daily activities. Concerns about adequate length of the right renal vein have resulted in more lapa-roscopic donor nephrectomies being performed on the left side, conflicting with the principle of leaving the do-nor with the best kidney. Although right nephrectomies are not more technically challenging than left nephrec-tomies, the short length of the right renal vein restrains the routine use of the right kidney for transplantation purposes. Preservation of the maximum length of the right renal vein continues to be a challenge for the sur-geon, and the technique described utilizes a modified Endo GIATM 30 Universal stapler for this purpose.

�Preoperative�Preparation

Before a patient consents to a laparoscopic nephrectomy, it is important to discuss the specific risks of the surgery, including the potential need to convert to the traditional open operation if difficulties arise.

The patient is admitted to the hospital the day before the surgery for bowel preparation, which includes 2 L of Colopeg® (1 envelope/L) p.o. and a Fleet® enema. Fast-ing starts at midnight before surgery. Thromboprophy-laxis is implemented with good hydration, placement of compressive elastic stockings on the lower extremities, and low-molecular-weight heparin. Enoxaparin (Clex-ane®, Lovenox®) 40 mg sc 1 × day or nadroparin (Flaxi-parine®, Fraxiparin®) 0.6 mL sc 1 × day is initiated on day 1 after the surgery and continued daily until the

Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Donor Nephrectomy

Chapter 10

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . 166 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . . 167 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

�Veress�Needle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169�First�Port�(11�mm,�optic�0°) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169�Second�Port� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169�Third�Port� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170�Fourth�Port�(5�mm,�suction�device) . . . . . . . . . 170�Fifth�Port�(5�mm,�liver�retractor�grasper) . . . . 172�Final�Position�of�the�Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Surgical Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172�Colon�Mobilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172�Ureter�and�Gonadal�Vessels�Identification . . 173�Exposure�and�Dissection�of�the�Renal�Hilum 174�Mobilization�of�the�Kidney�and�Ureter�Transection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174�Renal�Hilum�Ligature� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175�Kidney�Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177�Abdominal�Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Page 167: Manual of laparoscopic urology

166 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

patient is discharged from the hospital. In selected cases, the treatment is continued for 30 days after the proce-dure. Patients also receive antibiotic prophylaxis with a single preoperative dose of intravenous second-genera-tion cephalosporin, unless they are allergic to penicillin. Blood type and crossmatch are determined.

�Patient�Positioning�and�Initial�Preparation�

The patient is initially positioned supine for intravenous access, the induction of general anesthesia, and endotra-cheal intubation. An orogastric tube is placed and the stomach decompressed to avoid puncture during trocar placement and to allow additional space during abdom-inal insufflation. An 18Fr Foley catheter with 10 mL in the balloon is introduced for decompression of the blad-der. During skin preparation, the entire flank and abdo-men are included in case conversion to an open proce-dure is required. The umbilicus is placed over the break in the operating table, and the patient is positioned in a modified lateral decubitus position.

T I P

For left-side nephrectomy, the patient is placed in a strict lateral decubitus position.

The table can be flexed as needed or an inflatable bal-loon is positioned under the patient at the level of the umbilicus. Padding is used to support the buttocks and torso, and all potential pressure points are cushioned. An axillary roll is placed to prevent brachial plexus in-jury, and the arms should be positioned as far away from the trunk as possible so as not to disturb the movement of the operative team. The patient is held in position with strips of cloth tape (Fig. 1a,b).

The surgeon operates from the abdominal side of the patient, and the first assistant is placed caudally to the surgeon. The laparoscopic cart is positioned at the back of the patient’s chest, with the operative team facing the video monitor. The instruments table is positioned behind the operative team, and the assistant is posi-tioned on steps to prevent instruments from conflicting (Fig. 2a–c).

F I g . � 1

a�Patient�position.�b�Padding

Page 168: Manual of laparoscopic urology

167Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Donor Nephrectomy Chapter 10

�Trocars�and�Laparoscopic�Instruments

Right-side nephrectomy: 1 × 11 mm (optic 0°) 1 × 12 mm (Endo GIA and bipolar grasper) 3 × 5 mm (monopolar scissors, suction device, and liver retractor grasper)

Left-side nephrectomy: 2 × 11 mm (optic 0°, bipolar grasper, and 10-mm clip applier) 2 × 5 mm (monopolar scissors and suction device)

•••

Monopolar round-tipped scissors, bipolar grasper, liver retractor grasper, 5-mm suction device, needle drivers (2), 10-mm laparoscopic optic 0°, 10-mm clip applier (non-disposable), and Multifire Endo GIATM 30 stapler

�Access�and�Port�Placement

Four ports are generally enough to perform the proce-dure, although a fifth trocar may be necessary for liver retraction during right-side nephrectomy (Fig. 3). Be-

F I g . � 2

a� Patient� and� laparoscopic� cart.� b� Steps� below� assistant.�c�Instruments�table�behind�operative�team

Page 169: Manual of laparoscopic urology

168 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

F I g . � 3

Access�and�port�placement�(This�figure�was�published�in�Wein:�Campbell-Walsh�Urology,�9th�ed.,�Copyright�Elsevier)

F I g . � 4

a�Cutaneous�incision�below�costal�margin.�b�Insertion�of�Veress�needle

Page 170: Manual of laparoscopic urology

169Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Donor Nephrectomy Chapter 10

fore trocars are placed, the abdomen is insufflated using a Veress needle.

T I P

In case of previous surgery, the Veress needle is not inserted, and an open access procedure is done for the placement of the first trocar.

�Veress�Needle

A cutaneous incision is made two fingerbreadths below the costal margin arch, at the level of the lateral border of the rectus muscle (Fig. 4a,b).

T I P

The skin incision should be 50% larger than the diameter of the 11 mm trocar.

The Veress needle is introduced through the incision (see Chap. 1, Veress Needle Introduction).

�First�Port�(11�mm,�optic�0°)

Once pneumoperitoneum is established, the Veress needle is removed, and the 11-mm trocar is introduced through the same incision, perpendicularly to the ab-dominal wall (Fig. 5).

T I P

Pneumoperitoneum is established with an intra-abdominal pressure higher than 10 mmHg.

The optic is introduced through the device, and the ab-domen is then inspected for any injury due to insertion of the Veress needle or the trocar, and to identify adhe-sions in areas where the secondary ports will be placed. The insufflator line is then connected to the port.

�Second�Port�

For a left-side nephrectomy: 11 mm (10-mm clip ap-plier and bipolar grasper) For a right-side nephrectomy: 5 mm (monopolar round-tipped scissors)

F I g . � 5

Perpendicular�introduction�of�the�trocar

F I g . � 6

Triangulation�rule,�four�fingers

Page 171: Manual of laparoscopic urology

170 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

The triangulation rule must be followed for the place-ment of the trocars as the body habitus is different for each patient. Four fingerbreadths should be between the optic trocar and the working trocars (Fig. 6), and five fingerbreadths should be between the working trocars (Fig. 7a,b).

T I P

The 5-mm port is usually reserved for the most skilled hand, because the movements of the working instruments inside the smaller ports must be precise.

�Third�Port�

For a left-side nephrectomy: 5 mm (monopolar round-tipped scissors) For a right-side nephrectomy: 12 mm (Multifire Endo GIA 30 stapler and bipolar grasper)

The triangulation rule must be followed as above.

�Fourth�Port�(5�mm,�suction�device)

A cutaneous incision is made approximately midline between the umbilicus trocar and the anterior superior iliac spine on the side of the procedure for the introduc-tion of the 5-mm trocar.

F I g . � 7

a�Triangulation�rule,�five�fingers.�b�Ports�in�place

F I g . � 8

Right-side�ports

Page 172: Manual of laparoscopic urology

171Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Donor Nephrectomy Chapter 10

F I g . � 9

Left-side�ports

F I g . � 1 0

a� Colon� attachments� to� abdominal� wall.� b� Release� of� the�colon�attachments�to�abdominal�wall.�c�Colon�is�dissected�from� Gerota’s� fascia� (Gerota� is� not� freed� from� abdominal�wall)

Page 173: Manual of laparoscopic urology

172 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

�Fifth�Port�(5�mm,�liver�retractor�grasper)

A cutaneous incision is made approximately two fin-gerbreadths below the level of the second port for in-troduction of a 5-mm port in case a liver retraction is performed during a right-side nephrectomy (Fig. 8).

�Final�Position�of�the�Ports

See Figures 8 and 9.

The ports are finally tied to the skin with Vicryl 2-0 to prevent accidental removal.

�Surgical�Technique

�Colon�Mobilization

For a left-side nephrectomy, the plane between the descending colon and the underlying Gerota’s fas-

cia is developed to allow the colon to fall medially (Fig. 10a–c).

T I P

The lateral attachments of Gerota’s fascia to the abdominal wall should not be freed at this time to avoid the kidney falling medially into the op-erating field.

This plane of dissection is carried out cranially. The spl-enorenal and lienocolic ligaments are incised, allowing the spleen and the tail of the pancreas to be separated from the upper pole of the kidney. The en bloc dissection of the colon, spleen, and pancreas must be completed for adequate exposure of the renal hilum (Fig. 11a,b).

For a right-side nephrectomy, the liver is cranially retracted using a grasper that is fixed to the abdomi-nal wall (Fig. 12). The ascending colon is mobilized and dissected from the underlying Gerota’s fascia. Co-lon mobilization continues caudally to the common iliac vessels.

F I g . � 1 1

a�Spleen�is�released�from�kidney.�b�En�bloc�spleen�dissection

Page 174: Manual of laparoscopic urology

173Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Donor Nephrectomy Chapter 10

�Ureter�and�gonadal�Vessels�Identification

Following the medial mobilization of the colon and me-socolon, the gonadal vessels are visualized underneath Gerota’s fascia. The Gerota’s fatty tissue at the level of the lower pole of the kidney is incised and lifted to locate the psoas muscle (Fig. 13).

T I P

The correct maneuver to expose the psoas muscle is the continuous upper movement of the laparo-scopic instruments to lift the fatty tissue.

F I g . � 1 2

Grasper�retracting�liver

F I g . � 1 3

Lifting�of�fatty�tissue�to�expose�psoas�muscle

F I g . � 1 4

a�Dissection�of�ureter�and�gonadal�vessels.�b�Psoas�muscle

Page 175: Manual of laparoscopic urology

174 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

The psoas is followed to expose the ureter just lateral and deep to the gonadal vessels (Fig. 14a,b).

By tracking the cephalad course of the ureter, to-gether with the gonadal vessels on the left side, the plane is followed up to the renal hilum (Fig. 15).

Caudally, the ureter is dissected and freed until the crossing of the iliac vessels. The ureter and gonadal ves-sels are not divided at this time.

�Exposure�and�Dissection�of�the�Renal�Hilum

For a left-side nephrectomy, the renal vein is dissected along with the lumbar, gonadal, and adrenal veins (Fig. 16).

T I P

Care must be taken with: (1) the lumbar vessels that are usually located posterior and inferior to the renal vein and that cross over the renal ar-tery and (2) the adrenal vein that usually drains at the superior margin of the renal vessel. These vessels are cut to increase the length of the renal vein.

The left renal artery is dissected and exposed posterior to the veins (Fig. 17a,b).

For a right-side nephrectomy, the duodenum is medi-ally mobilized by performing a Kocher maneuver until the vena cava is clearly visualized.

T I P

For a right-side nephrectomy, the vena cava is mobilized laterally, and the left renal vein is dis-sected and gently displaced to expose the plane between the aorta and the inferior vena cava. The right renal artery is dissected and exposed at its origin. The aim is to attain maximal length of the donor vessel (Fig. 18).

The right renal vein is dissected at the lateral border of the vena cava.

�Mobilization�of�the�Kidney��and�Ureter�Transection

The dissection continues cranially to the upper pole of the kidney, and the adrenal gland is separated from it.

F I g . � 1 5

Renal�hilum

F I g . � 1 6

Left�gonadal�(G),�adrenal�(A),�and�renal�(R)�veins

Page 176: Manual of laparoscopic urology

175Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Donor Nephrectomy Chapter 10

This is accomplished by incising Gerota’s fascia anteri-orly just above the hilum and then carefully peeling off the Gerota’s fat circumferentially above the upper pole of the kidney.

T I P

At this point during the dissection, care must be taken with the short adrenal vein on the right side that drains into the inferior vena cava at its posterolateral side.

For a right-side nephrectomy, superior retraction of the liver facilitates the dissection of the plane between the liver and the upper pole of the kidney (Fig. 19).

The attachments of the kidney to the posterior and lateral abdominal wall are released by blunt and sharp dissection, taking care to coagulate the bleeding vessels. Inferiorly, the ureter is ligated with one large (L) Hem-o-lok® clip applied to its most distal portion, and it is then transected to allow the kidney to be fully mobilized.

�Renal�Hilum�Ligature�

A 6–8 cm lower ilioinguinal incision is made, but the muscle attached to the peritoneum is not incised to pre-serve the pneumoperitoneum. A large laparoscopic bag (EndoCatch® II 15 mm, Tyco Autosuture) is introduced through the small opening of the peritoneum at the il-

F I g . � 1 7

a�Renal�artery�exposed.�b�Renal�artery�dissected

F I g . � 1 8

Vena�cava�(A);�Left�renal�vein�(B);�Right�renal�artery�(C);�In-tercavoaortic�Space�(D);�Liver�(L)

Page 177: Manual of laparoscopic urology

176 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

ioinguinal incision. The kidney, attached only to the hi-lum, is placed into the bag, and the EndoCatch arm is pulled out to partially close the metal ring around the hilum (Fig. 20).

T I P

A Kocher clamp is placed at the EndoCatch arm to hold the metal ring in place to prevent its opening.

T I P

The string of the EndoCatch must not be touched to avoid detachment of the bag.

At this time, two extra-large (XL) Hem-o-lok clips are applied to the proximal portion of the renal artery with-out cutting it.

T I P

As soon as the clip is applied to the artery, the warm ischemia begins.

The right renal vein is gently stretched. The vein is then stapled and divided using the Multifire Endo GIATM 30 12-mm stapler (Autosuture) introduced through the third port (12 mm). The tension on the renal vein places the row of staples on the lateral part of the vena cava, increasing the donor vein length (Fig. 21). The left re-nal vein is proximally clipped with two extra-large (XL) Hem-o-lok clips and then transected, leaving a 2-mm vein margin to prevent the slipping of the clips.

T I P

No clips are placed at the kidney side of the renal artery and vein.

F I g . � 1 9

Dissection�plane�between�liver�and�kidney�upper�pole�

F I g . � 2 0

Right� renal� vein� (A);� Vena� cava� (B);� Right� renal� artery� (C);�EndoCatch�metal�ring�(D)

Page 178: Manual of laparoscopic urology

17 7Transperitoneal Laparoscopic Donor Nephrectomy Chapter 10

Following transection of the renal vein, the renal artery is then cut.

T I P

The Multifire Endo GIA 30 stapler is used for securing and transecting the main right renal vein, but the triple staggered rows of staples of the kidney side are removed to allow for a lon-ger donor vein (Fig. 22). The rows of staples can be individually removed using a thin needle or by cutting the fixation of the pusher at its base with a scalpel and then firing it to release the staples. The empty rows are yellow colored, fa-cilitating the visualization of the correct side of the Endo GIA that will be applied to the renal vein (Fig. 23).

�Kidney�Extraction

Once all of the hilar vessels have been divided, a simple digital avulsion of the muscle and peritoneum around the arm of the EndoCatch opens completely the ilioin-guinal incision, allowing the EndoCatch with the speci-men inside to be easily removed. The kidney is then

F I g . � 2 1

Vena� cava� (A);� Stapled� cuff� of� vena� cava� (B);� Loose� sta-ples�(C)

F I g . � 2 2

Superior� fixation� of� the� pusher� intact� (A);� Inferior� fixation�of�the�pusher�sectioned�(B);�Clip�pusher�(C)

F I g . � 2 3

Yellow�colored�empty�rows�(Y)

Page 179: Manual of laparoscopic urology

178 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

taken to the bench, where it is flushed with a preserva-tion solution (Custodiol HTK, Tramedico).

�Abdominal�Closure

The abdominal wall is closed using running Vicryl 2-0 SH 1 Plus (needle ½ 21.8 mm) for the peritoneum, Vic-ryl 0 suture in “X” for the muscle, and a running Vic-ryl 1 CT Plus (needle ½ 39.9 mm) for the aponeurosis. Once the abdominal wall is closed, pneumoperitoneum is re-established, and the optic is introduced for revi-sion of the hemostasis. A silicone Penrose drain is in-serted. After evacuation of the pneumoperitoneum and removal of the trocars, the aponeurosis of the 11-mm and 12-mm ports are closed with a Dexon II HGU-46 suture. The skin incisions are closed with subcuticular Monocryl 3-0 C 423 and routinely infiltrated with 0.25% bupivacaine.

�Postoperative�Considerations

The nasogastric tube is removed at the end of the proce-dure, and the intravenous perfusion is stopped on day 1. Pain is controlled with scheduled intramuscular nonste-roidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs) and oral an-algesics. Intramuscular NSAIDs are often discontinued after 24 h. A light diet can generally be resumed on day 1 after surgery. The Foley catheter is removed on day 1

after surgery and the Penrose drain on the second post-operative day. Patients leave the hospital on the third or fourth postoperative day. Normal light activities are resumed after hospital discharge, but vigorous activities and heavy lifting are limited for at least one month after surgery.

�Suggested�Readings

Bollens R, Mikhaski D: Laparoscopic live donor right ne-phrectomy: a new technique to maximize the length of the renal vein using a modified Endo GIA stapler. Eur Urol 2007 May; 51(5):1326–1331.Sundaram CP, Martin GL: Complications after a 5-year experience with laparoscopic donor nephrectomy: the Indiana University experience. Surg Endosc 2007 May; 21(5):724–728. Breda A, Veale J: Complications of laparoscopic living do-nor nephrectomy and their management: the UCLA expe-rience. Urology 2007 Jan; 69(1):49–52.Chin EH, Hazzan D: Laparoscopic donor nephrectomy: intraoperative safety, immediate morbidity, and delayed complications with 500 cases. Surg Endosc 2007 Apr; 21(4):521–526.Fisher PC, Montgomery JS: 200 consecutive hand assisted laparoscopic donor nephrectomies: evolution of operative technique and outcomes. J Urol 2006 Apr; 175(4):1439–1443.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Page 180: Manual of laparoscopic urology

�Introduction

Bilateral nephrectomy is occasionally indicated in symptomatic autosomal dominant polycystic kidney disease (ADPKD) patients with end-stage renal disease. These patients are subject to hypertension, hemorrhage into the renal cysts, recurrent renal calculi formation, pain, and infection. Laparoscopic hand-assisted bilat-eral nephrectomy provides many advantages over staged nephrectomies, including the single administration of general anesthesia. It is a safe and reliable option with lower morbidity, reduced hospitalization, and superior cosmesis when compared with open nephrectomy. De-spite the technical difficulties in removing bilateral giant kidneys in a single setting, the laparoscopic hand-as-sisted technique is a feasible option for providing effec-tive relief of symptoms in ADPKD patients.

�Indications

Giant symptomatic autosomal dominant polycystic kidney disease (ADPKD) Acquired cystic kidney disease (ACKD) and inciden-tal renal tumors

�Preoperative�Preparation

Before a patient consents to a laparoscopic hand-as-sisted bilateral nephrectomy, it is important to discuss the specific risks of the surgery, including the potential need to convert to the traditional open operation if dif-ficulties arise.

The patient is admitted to the hospital the night be-fore the surgery for bowel preparation, which includes

Hand-Assisted Bilateral Laparoscopic Intraperitoneal Nephrectomy

Chapter 11

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . 180 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . 181 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

�Veress�Needle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181�First�Port�(11�mm,�optic�0°,�scissors,�LigaSure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181�Cutaneous�Incision�(hand�introduction) . . . . 183�Second�Port�(11�mm,�optic�and�suction�device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183�Third�Port�(11�mm,�optic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Surgical Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184�Right�Kidney . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185�Left�Kidney . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185�Bilateral�Ureterectomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185�Kidney�Extraction� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186�Closure�of�the�Abdominal�Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Page 181: Manual of laparoscopic urology

180 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

2 L of Colopeg (1 envelope/L) p.o. and a Fleet enema. Fasting starts at midnight before surgery. Thrombopro-phylaxis is implemented with good hydration, placement of compressive elastic stockings on the lower extremi-ties, and low-molecular-weight heparin. Enoxaparin (Clexane®, Lovenox®) 40 mg sc 1 × day or nadroparin (Flaxiparine®, Fraxiparin®) 0.6 mL sc 1 × day is initiated on day 1 after the surgery and continued daily until the patient is discharged from the hospital. In selected cases, the treatment is continued for 30 days after the proce-

dure. Patients also receive antibiotic prophylaxis with a single preoperative dose of intravenous second-genera-tion cephalosporin, unless they are allergic to penicillin. Blood type and crossmatch are determined.

�Patient�Positioning�and�Initial�Preparation

The surgery is performed under general anesthesia. The base of the table must be positioned below the patient’s

F I g . � 2

Operative�team’s�position

F I g . � 3

Dark-colored�gloves

F I g . � 1

Patient’s�position

Page 182: Manual of laparoscopic urology

181Hand-Assisted Bilateral Laparoscopic NephrectomyChapter 11

hip to avoid elevation of the abdomen while in the Tren-delenburg position. The patient is placed in the supine position with the lower limbs in abduction, allowing the surgeon to be placed between the legs of the patient. The lower buttocks must be placed at the distal end of the operating table. The upper limbs are positioned along-side the body to avoid the risk of stretch injuries to the brachial plexus and to allow for free movements of the operative team (Fig. 1).

A nasogastric catheter is placed by the anesthesiolo-gist and the stomach decompressed to avoid puncture during trocar placement and to allow additional space during extraperitoneal insufflation. The abdomen, pel-vis, and genitalia are skin prepared in case conversion to an open procedure is required. An 18Fr Foley cath-eter with 10 mL in the balloon is introduced before the placement of the sterile drapes.

The surgeon is positioned between the patient’s legs; the first assistant initially stands at the patient’s left side (Fig. 2) and then moves to the right side for the left ne-phrectomy stage. For the right nephrectomy stage, the laparoscopic cart is placed to the right side, lateral to the patient’s head, while the instruments table and the coag-ulation unit are positioned at the left side of the patient. For the left-side nephrectomy, the monitor is placed at the patient’s left side.

�Trocars�and�Laparoscopic�Instruments�

3 × 11 mm (optic 0°, scissors, suction device, and Li-gaSure) Monopolar round-tipped scissors, suction device, needle drivers (2), 10-mm laparoscopic optic 0°, Li-gaSure 5 mm.

T I P

The surgeon uses dark-colored surgical gloves to reduce light reflection while performing the hand-assisted procedure (Fig. 3).

�Access�and�Port�Placement

�Veress�Needle

A cutaneous incision is made at the level of the inferior margin of the umbilicus.

T I P

The skin incision should be 50% larger than the diameter of the 11-mm trocar.

The Veress needle is introduced through the incision (see Chap. 1, Veress Needle Introduction). The insuffla-tion line is connected to the Veress needle, the stopcock is opened, and insufflation is initiated.

T I P

It is recommended to start with low flow to avoid damage to a vital structure in case the needle is malpositioned. Switch to high flow if the pres-sure of insufflation is increasing at a steady and normal level and there is also a tympanic per-cussion of the liver area.

�First�Port�(11�mm,�optic�0°,�scissors,�LigaSure)

Once pneumoperitoneum is established, the Veress needle is removed, and the 11-mm trocar is introduced through the same incision, perpendicularly to the ab-dominal wall.

T I P

Pneumoperitoneum is established with an intra-abdominal pressure higher than 10 mmHg.

The optic is introduced through the trocar, and the ab-domen is then inspected for any injury due to insertion

Page 183: Manual of laparoscopic urology

182 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

F I g . � 4

Access�and�port�placement�(This�figure�was�published�in�Wein:�Campbell-Walsh�Urology,�9th�ed.,�Copyright�Elsevier)

F I g . � 5

Ilioinguinal�cutaneous�incision

F I g . � 6

Peritoneal�puncture�made�with�Mayo�scissors

Page 184: Manual of laparoscopic urology

183Hand-Assisted Bilateral Laparoscopic NephrectomyChapter 11

of the Veress needle or the trocar, and to identify adhe-sions in areas where the secondary ports will be placed. The insufflation tubing is then connected.

�Cutaneous�Incision�(hand�introduction)

A right ilioinguinal cutaneous incision is made, and the planes are opened to expose the muscle and the perito-neum attached to it (Fig. 5).

T I P

If a kidney graft is already in place, the hand port is medially displaced.

With the aid of Mayo scissors, a peritoneal punc-ture is made at the incision for the insertion of one finger (Fig. 6), and, following successive introduction of the other fingers, the full left hand is introduced (Fig. 7a, b).

T I P

Jelly is applied to the fingers to facilitate their introduction, and the hand must snugly fit into the incision to avoid air leakage.

�Second�Port�(11�mm,�optic��and�suction�device)

A skin incision is made four fingerbreadths above the umbilicus in the midline, and an 11-mm trocar is in-troduced under vision and with the aid of the hand in-serted into the abdominal cavity (Fig. 8).

F I g . � 7

a�Gel�applied�to�fingers.�b�Hand�inserted

F I g . � 8

Hand�inside�abdomen�aids�with�trocar�insertion

Page 185: Manual of laparoscopic urology

184 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

�Third�Port�(11�mm,�optic)

A skin incision is made four fingerbreadths to the left of the umbilicus.

T I P

The incision should be 50% larger than the di-ameter of the 11-mm trocar.

An 11-mm trocar is introduced under vision and with the aid of the hand inserted into the abdominal cavity (Fig. 9a,b).

�Surgical�Technique

Sequence of dissection: 1. Right kidney lower pole 2. Right kidney upper pole 3. Left kidney lower pole 4. Left kidney upper pole

T I P

This dissection sequence will avoid excessive en-larging of the abdominal cavity incision, reduc-ing the possibility of air leakage.

••••

F I g . � 9

a�Trocars�in�place.�b�Trocars�and�hand�in�place

F I g . � 1 0

Instruments�in�place

Page 186: Manual of laparoscopic urology

185Hand-Assisted Bilateral Laparoscopic NephrectomyChapter 11

�Right�Kidney

The right colon is dissected from Gerota’s fascia, and the duodenum is mobilized (Kocher maneuver). Then, the left hand is passed under the inferior, lateral, and superior kidney side to free the specimen while the Li-gaSure 5 mm (set at III 01/01) aids with the dissection (Fig. 10).

T I P

The instrument is introduced through the um-bilical port.

The ureter is clipped and transected.When approaching the pedicle, the optic is placed

in the supraumbilical port, and the suction device is placed in the left lateral port (Fig. 10). The renal vas-cular pedicle is carefully dissected, clipped, and tran-sected.

�Left�Kidney

The monitor is placed at the left side of the patient, the assistant moves to the right, and the instruments table is placed behind the surgeon. The left colon is dissected from Gerota’s fascia. Then, the left hand is passed under the inferior, lateral, and superior kidney side to free the specimen while the LigaSure 5 mm (set at III 01/01) aids with the dissection.

T I P

Care must be taken to avoid spleen damage while releasing the left kidney.

The ureter is clipped and transected. The renal vascu-lar pedicle is carefully dissected, clipped, and tran-sected.

�Bilateral�Ureterectomy

When performing an associated bilateral ureterec-tomy, the surgeon moves to the patient’s left side while the assistant is repositioned to the right. The laparo-scopic cart is positioned at the patient’s feet. A 5-mm trocar is inserted four fingerbreadths to the right of the umbilicus and approximately in line with the contralat-eral third port. The optic is placed in the supraumbilical port, the bipolar grasper is placed at the left-side port,

F I g . � 1 1

Change� of� position� of� instruments� for� bilateral� ureterec-tomy

F I g . � 1 2

Specimen�removal

Page 187: Manual of laparoscopic urology

186 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

the monopolar scissors are placed at the umbilical port, and the suction device is placed at the right-side port (Fig. 11).

�Kidney�Extraction�

The kidneys are removed through the lower ilioingui-nal incision, and the laparoscopic bag is not needed (Fig. 12).

�Closure�of�the�Abdominal�Wall

The abdominal wall is closed using running Vicryl 2-0 SH 1 Plus (needle ½ 21.8 mm) for the peritoneum, Vic-ryl 0 suture in “X” for the muscle, and a running Vic-ryl 1 CT Plus (needle ½ 39.9 mm) for the aponeurosis. Once the abdominal wall is closed, pneumoperitoneum is re-established, and the optic is introduced for revi-sion of the hemostasis. A silicone Penrose drain is in-serted. After evacuation of the pneumoperitoneum and removal of the trocars, the aponeurosis of the 11-mm port is closed with a Dexon II HGU-46 suture. The skin incisions are closed with subcuticular Monocryl 3-0 C 423 (Fig. 13).

�Postoperative�Considerations

The nasogastric tube is removed at the end of the pro-cedure, and the intravenous perfusion is stopped on day 1. Pain is usually controlled with scheduled intravenous analgesics, which are replaced by the oral route after 24 hours. A light diet can generally be resumed on day 1 after surgery. The Foley catheter is removed on day 1 af-ter surgery and the Penrose drain on day 2 after surgery. Patients leave the hospital on the third or fourth postop-erative day and can resume normal light activities. Vig-orous activities and heavy lifting are limited for at least one month after surgery.

�Suggested�Readings

Lipke MC, Bargman V: Limitations of laparoscopy for bilat-eral nephrectomy for autosomal dominant polycystic kid-ney disease. J Urol 2007 Feb; 177(2):627–631.Ghasemian SR, Pedraza R: Bilateral laparoscopic radical nephrectomy for renal tumors in patients with acquired cystic kidney disease. J Laparoendosc Adv Surg Tech A 2005 Dec; 15(6):606–610.Luke PPW, Spodeka J: Hand-assisted laparoscopic resec-tion of the massive autosomal dominant polycystic kidney disease. Urology 2004 Feb; 63(2):369–372. Lee DI, Clayman RV: Hand-assisted laparoscopic nephrec-tomy in autosomal dominant polycystic kidney disease. J Endourol 2004 May; 18(4):379–382.Gill IS, Kaouk JH: Laparoscopic bilateral synchronous ne-phrectomy for autosomal dominant polycystic kidney dis-ease: the initial experience. J Urol 2001 Apr; 165(4):1093–1098.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

F I g . � 1 3

Final�result

Page 188: Manual of laparoscopic urology

�Introduction

Genitourinary prolapse occurs when the mechanisms for vaginal and uterine support begin to wear off. The most common prolapse is cystourethrocele, followed by uterine descent and rectocele. The correction of symp-tomatic moderate and severe genitourinary prolapse by the laparoscopic promontory fixation technique consists of placing two polyester (PET) meshes that pull the pro-lapsed bladder and rectum up. The distal part of the an-terior mesh is fixed at the anterior vaginal wall, and the posterior mesh is fixed distally at the levator ani muscle bilaterally. The proximal part of the anterior and pos-terior mesh is anchored to the sacral promontory. The posterior dissection extends deep into the rectovaginal space, and the transperitoneal laparoscopic access al-lows for a good visualization of the operative field, as opposed to the open procedure.

�Preoperative�Preparation

The patient is admitted to the hospital the day before the surgery for bowel preparation, which includes 2 L of Colopeg® (1 envelope/L) p.o. and a Fleet® enema. Fast-ing starts at midnight before surgery. Thromboprophy-laxis is implemented with good hydration, placement of compressive elastic stockings on the lower extremities, and low-molecular-weight heparin. Enoxaparin (Clex-ane®, Lovenox®) 40 mg sc 1 × day or nadroparin (Flaxi-parine®, Fraxiparin®) 0.6 mL sc 1 × day is initiated on day 1 after the surgery and continued daily until the pa-tient is discharged from the hospital. In selected cases, the treatment is continued for 30 days after the proce-dure. Patients also receive antibiotic prophylaxis with a single preoperative dose of intravenous second-genera-

Laparoscopic Promontory Fixation

Chapter 12

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . 188 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . 188 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

�Veress�Needle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189�First�Port�(11�mm,�optic�0°) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190�Second�Port�(11�mm,�bipolar�grasper) . . . . . . 190�Third�Port�(5�mm,�suction�device) . . . . . . . . . . . 190�Fourth�Port�(5�mm,�monopolar��round-tipped�scissors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Surgical Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191�Bowel�Displacement� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191�Subtotal�Hysterectomy�and�Anexectomy . . . 192�Posterior�Dissection�(Rectovaginal�Plane) . . . 194�Fixation�of�the�Posterior�Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195�Anterior�Dissection�(Vesicovaginal�Plane) . . . 196�Fixation�of�the�Vaginal�Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197�Exposure�of�the�Promontory� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197�Promontory�Fixation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198�Closure�of�the�Posterior�Peritoneum� . . . . . . . 200

Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Schematic mesh position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Page 189: Manual of laparoscopic urology

188 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

tion cephalosporin, unless they are allergic to penicillin. Blood type and crossmatch are determined.

�Patient�Positioning�and�Initial�Preparation

The surgery is performed under general anesthesia. The patient is placed in the supine position with the lower limbs in abduction, allowing the laparoscopic cart to be moved toward the surgeon and intraoperative access to the perineum. The lower buttocks must be placed at the distal end of the operating table. The upper limbs are positioned alongside the body to avoid the risk of stretch injuries to the brachial plexus and to allow for free movements of the operative team. Shoulder sup-port over the acromium clavicular joint is placed for the Trendelenburg position (Fig. 1).

A nasogastric tube is placed by the anesthesiologist and the stomach decompressed to allow additional space for the placement of the small bowel above the promon-tory. An 18Fr Foley catheter with 10 mL in the balloon is introduced after placement of the sterile drapes (Fig. 2).

The surgeon and the second assistant operate from the patient’s left side, and the first assistant is placed at the opposite side of the surgeon. The laparoscopic cart is positioned at the patient’s feet, while the instruments table and the coagulation unit are positioned at the left side of the patient.

�Trocars�and�Laparoscopic�Instruments�

2 × 11 mm (optic 0° and bipolar grasper) 2 × 5 mm (scissors and suction device)

••

F I g . � 2

Placement�of�the�drapes

F I g . � 1

Shoulder�support

Page 190: Manual of laparoscopic urology

189Laparoscopic Promontory FixationChapter 12

Monopolar round-tipped scissors, bipolar grasper, dissector, 5-mm suction device, needle drivers (2), and 10-mm laparoscopic optic 0°

• Polyester multifilament mesh (Fig. 3)

�Access�and�Port�Placement

See Figure 4.

�Veress�Needle

A cutaneous incision is made at the inferior margin of the umbilicus, and the Veress needle is introduced through the incision (see Chap. 1, Veress Needle Intro-duction).

T I P

The incision should be 50% larger than the di-ameter of the trocar.

F I g . � 3

Polyester�mesh

F I g . � 4

Access�and�port�placement�(This�figure�was�published�in�Wein:�Campbell-Walsh�Urology,�9th�ed.,�Copyright�Elsevier)

Page 191: Manual of laparoscopic urology

190 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

The insufflation tubing is connected to the Veress needle, the stopcock is opened, and insufflation is initi-ated.

T I P

It is recommended to start with low flow to avoid damage to a vital structure in case the needle is malpositioned. Switch to high flow if the pres-sure of insufflation is increasing at a steady and normal level and there is also a tympanic per-cussion of the liver area.

�First�Port�(11�mm,�optic�0°)

Once pneumoperitoneum is established, the needle is removed, and the 11-mm trocar is introduced through the same incision, perpendicularly to the abdominal wall.

T I P

Pneumoperitoneum is established with an intra-abdominal pressure higher than 10 mmHg.

The optic is inserted through the trocar, and the insuf-flation line connected to it.

�Second�Port�(11�mm,�bipolar�grasper)

A cutaneous incision is made 2 cm medial to the left an-terior superior iliac spine for introduction of the 11-mm trocar.

T I P

During trocar introduction, once the cutting tip pierces the peritoneum, it secures the position of the device, allowing further gliding of the trocar to a desired site. This maneuver prevents block-age of the movements of the working instruments following an incorrect insertion.

�Third�Port�(5�mm,�suction�device)

A cutaneous incision is made 2 cm medial to the right anterior superior iliac spine for introduction of the 5-mm trocar.

�Fourth�Port�(5�mm,��monopolar�round-tipped�scissors)

For insertion of the 5-mm trocar, a cutaneous inci-sion is made at a point situated at the junction of the lateral 2/3 and medial 1/3 distance between the right anterior superior iliac spine trocar and the umbilicus trocar (see Fig.5).

T I P

Pay attention to the epigastric vessels, which can be visualized by pressing the right lateral part of the abdomen.

The operating table is moved down and backward, and the patient is placed in an extended Trendelenburg po-

F I g . � 5

Camera�(1);�Bipolar�grasper�(2);�Suction�device�(3);�and�Scis-sors�(4)

Page 192: Manual of laparoscopic urology

191Laparoscopic Promontory FixationChapter 12

sition. Steps are placed under the surgeon, and the bi-polar and monopolar pedals are placed over the step. The surgeon, positioned higher than the assistant, can then use the working instruments (bipolar grasper and monopolar scissors) without being restrained by the as-sistant holding the optic in the upper midline position. This maneuver reduces the conflict between the opera-tive team’s arms.

�Surgical�Technique

�Bowel�Displacement�

The sigmoid is positioned above the promontory by gently pushing back the loops of small bowel with the aid of the Trendelenburg position. If necessary, the cecum is dissected off the posterior peritoneum to increase its mobility and facilitate cranial displacement of the small bowel.

T I P

When facing difficulties retracting the bowels or when the patient cannot handle the extended Trendelenburg position, a fifth trocar (5 mm) can be introduced in the right iliac fossa, and a bowel retractor can then be used by the second assistant.

The sigmoid and its mesocolon are laterally displaced and fixed to the abdominal wall using a monofilament suture of 2-0 straight needle (Fig. 6a,b).

T I P

The suture needle is introduced through the skin at a point lateral and caudal to the left port, placed through the appendices epiploicae of the sigmoid colon, and exited close to the entrance point to be tied externally.

A valve is introduced into the vagina to aid in the ex-posure of the Douglas cul-de-sac and to facilitate the dissection of the rectovaginal and vesicovaginal plane (Figs. 7 and 8).

F I g . � 6

a�Suture�through�appendices�epiploicae.�b�External�fixation�of�the�sigmoid�to�abdominal�wall

Page 193: Manual of laparoscopic urology

192 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

�Subtotal�Hysterectomy�and�Anexectomy

If a subtotal hysterectomy with anexectomy is per-formed, the ureters are identified coursing down into the pelvis. The ovary is grasped and tractioned upward to better expose the infundibulopelvic ligament. The pedicle is then fully coagulated with the aid of the bipo-lar grasper and cut with monopolar scissors (Figs. 9a,b and 10a,b).

The dissection continues to expose the round liga-ment, which is coagulated and cut (Fig. 11).

The anterior and posterior leaves of broad ligament are dissected down to the vesicouterine fold and cut

F I g . � 7

Vaginal�valve

F I g . � 8

Douglas�cul-de-sac�(A);�Valve�in�the�vagina�(B)

F I g . � 9

a�Infundibulopelvic�ligament.�b�Bipolar�coagulation

close to the uterus. The vesicoperitoneal fold is lifted and incised, mobilizing the bladder off the vagina. The uterine vessels are visualized and cut following coagula-tion with the bipolar grasper (Fig. 12).

Page 194: Manual of laparoscopic urology

193Laparoscopic Promontory FixationChapter 12

T I P

In case of bleeding, applying traction to the tis-sue reduces the blood flow, and bleeding then can be controlled with the bipolar grasper.

The same procedure is done at the other side, and the uterus is transected with monopolar scissors above the cervix (Fig. 13).

The specimen is then placed higher than the level of the promontory to be removed at the end of the proce-dure.

F I g . � 1 0

a�Infundibulopelvic�ligament�coagulated.�b�Ligament�transected

F I g . � 1 1

Round�ligament

F I g . � 1 2

Uterine�artery�(A)

Page 195: Manual of laparoscopic urology

194 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

T I P

To facilitate its removal, the uterus is grasped by opposite sides and cut throughout its axis with a N°15 scalpel that is fixed to a needle holder. It is then placed inside a laparoscopic bag and removed through an enlargement of the left 11-mm port incision.

�Posterior�Dissection��(Rectovaginal�Plane)

When the uterus is in place, it must be mobilized off the pelvic cavity for the posterior dissection. The uterus is then fixed to the anterior abdominal wall using a mono-filament 2-0 straight needle suture that transfixes its body.

F I g . � 1 3

Transected�cervix�(A)

F I g . � 1 4

Douglas�pouch�incised

F I g . � 1 5

Correct� plane� of� dissection� (A);� Wrong� plane� of� dissec-tion�(B)

F I g . � 1 6

Levator�ani�muscle�(A);�Rectum�(B);�Suction�device�(S)�at�the�inferior�part�of�the�dissection

Page 196: Manual of laparoscopic urology

195Laparoscopic Promontory FixationChapter 12

T I P

The suture needle is introduced through the skin at a midline point above the pubis, placed through the uterus, and exited close to the en-trance point to be tied externally.

The valve is inserted inside the vagina and is lifted to expose the Douglas pouch. The posterior peritoneum is grasped by the bipolar grasper and is placed under trac-tion. The peritoneum is incised close to its superior de-flection, and the inferior peritoneal lip with the fatty tis-sue attached is pulled down to expose the correct plane of dissection (Fig. 14).

T I P

Two planes of dissection are encountered at this level. The right one is between the fatty tissue and the vagina, and by applying downward trac-tion, the avascular plane of loose areolar tissue is exposed (Fig. 15). The wrong plane of dissec-tion is between the fatty tissue and the rectum, and by following this plane, the chance of rectum injuries increases.

The vagina is dissected from the rectum up to the level of the canal anal. The superior plane is followed laterally to arrive at the lateral wall of rectum, exposing the leva-tor ani muscles bilaterally (Figs. 16 and 17).

T I P

The assistant positions the suction device at the inferior part of the dissection and pushes down on the tissue at every step of the dissection to facilitate access to the right plane.

�Fixation�of�the�Posterior�Mesh

Following exposure of the levator ani muscle, the poste-rior mesh is introduced through the left 11-mm trocar, and it is bilaterally fixed to the uppermost part of the muscle using Ti-Cron® 2-0 sutures (needle ½ 26 cm).

T I P

The position of the needle on the needle holder is 2/3 posterior and at a 45º angle. To insert the needle on the muscle, it first must be pushed in to load the needle onto the tissue. Then, the needle is turned, and the other needle holder is positioned below the exit point of the needle, grasping and fixing its tip (Fig. 18a,b). Finally, the needle is removed from the muscle following its curvature to prevent rectum damage.

T I P

The knot must be loosely tied to avoid postop-eratory pain at the level of the anus.

The broad part of the prosthesis is spread out over the rectum and placed as close to the vaginal deflection as possible (Fig. 19).

The Douglas pouch’s peritoneum is closed us-ing a U-shaped running suture of Vicryl 0. The mesh

F I g . � 1 7

Left�(A)�and�right�(B)�levator�ani�muscles;�Rectum�(C)

Page 197: Manual of laparoscopic urology

196 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

is included in the suture, fixing it to the peritoneum (Fig. 20).

�Anterior�Dissection�(Vesicovaginal�Plane)

The valve is introduced into the vagina and is lifted to put traction on the peritoneum. The peritoneum of the vesicouterine fold is transversely incised to expose the

F I g . � 1 8

a�Needle�position�for�the�right�side.�b�Needle�position�for�the�left�side

F I g . � 1 9

Posterior�mesh�over�rectum

F I g . � 2 0

Closure�of�posterior�peritoneum

Page 198: Manual of laparoscopic urology

197Laparoscopic Promontory FixationChapter 12

avascular plane of loose areolar tissue that separates the posterior surface of the bladder and the anterior vaginal wall (Fig. 21).

T I P

The muscle fibers of the anterior vagina wall must be preserved to decrease the risk of mesh erosion.

The dissection of this plane is carried out along the mid-line and extends laterally and inferiorly to the bladder trigone, taking care not to injure the bladder, vagina, or ureter.

T I P

The ureter courses anteromedially after it passes under the uterine vessels, progressing toward the trigone of the bladder through a fascial tunnel on the anterior vaginal wall. In case the bladder or the vagina is accidentally opened, a running Vicryl 0 suture is used for repair.

�Fixation�of�the�Vaginal�Mesh

The anterior mesh is introduced through the left 11-mm trocar. After the mesh is spread out to cover the anterior vaginal wall, it is fixed to the apex and bilateral anterior vaginal wall using running Ti-Cron 2-0 sutures (needle ½ 26 mm) (Fig. 22a,b).

T I P

The suture should not transfix the vaginal wall.

If a subtotal hysterectomy is performed, the uterine cer-vix is also incorporated in this suture.

T I P

When the uterus is left in situ, the mesh is par-tially divided. Each arm of the anterior mesh is passed through the broad ligament at the level of the isthmus on both sides of the organ, but from a safe distance from the uterine vessels. In case of asymmetric prolapse, the cervix can be slightly displaced to compensate for the asymme-try. In this case, the suture is placed at different levels on both sides of the cervix.

�Exposure�of�the�Promontory�

The promontory is either visualized or felt by palpation with the tip of the instruments. A longitudinal incision is performed on the posterior prevertebral parietal peri-toneum to expose the anterior vertebral or presacral ligament, taking particular care not to injure the iliac vessels and the presacral (medium sacral vein) vessels. The incision on the peritoneum is then extended from the promontory to the right side of the Douglas pouch

F I g . � 2 1

Valve�in�the�vagina�(A);�Bladder�(B)

Page 199: Manual of laparoscopic urology

198 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

to further cover the mesh at the end of the procedure (Fig. 23a,b).

T I P

The “true horizon” of the optic must be correctly placed at this time to avoid unintentional dissec-tion of the right common iliac artery instead of the promontory.

�Promontory�Fixation

A full-length Ti-Cron 1 suture (needle ½ 37 mm) is passed through the presacral ligament.

T I P

The position of the needle on the needle holder is 1/3 anterior and at a 45º angle.

F I g . � 2 2

a�Left-side�fixation.�b�Right-side�fixation

F I g . � 2 3

a�Promontory�dissection.�b�Promontory�(P)�exposed

Page 200: Manual of laparoscopic urology

199Laparoscopic Promontory FixationChapter 12

The needle must be inserted from the right to the left with small and continuous movements of the needle on the anterior vertebral ligament (Fig. 24).

T I P

The needle is introduced from right to left and with small movements because the left common iliac artery is more laterally located at this site, and the point of exit of the needle is less con-trolled than the entrance point.

The needle runs only through the fibrous layer of the aponeurosis, avoiding perforation of the disc itself and the risk of iatrogenic spondylodiscitis.

After passing the suture, traction is applied to the thread to check that it is solidly anchored. The needle is positioned facing the head of the table and passed first through the posterior mesh and then passed through the anterior mesh. The needle charged with both prosthesis and with the tip facing the optic is placed at the prom-ontory, simulating a hook, to determine the tension at the anterior and posterior mesh (Fig. 25a,b).

The right needle holder secures the meshes at the promontory while the left needle holder tests the ten-sion. The posterior mesh should have no tension, and it

should follow the curvature of the sacrum to respect the physiological movement of the Douglas pouch, avoid-ing postoperatory dyschesia. The anterior mesh should have medium tension applied to it, and the exact ten-sion is confirmed by touching the mesh with the left needle holder. The knot is done extracorporeally using a half-hitch type knot (Weston knot). By passing both

F I g . � 2 4

Needle�position�for�promontory�fixation

F I g . � 2 5

a�Needle�position.�b�Mesh�held�in�place�

Page 201: Manual of laparoscopic urology

200 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

ends of the suture line through the right paraumbili-cal port (5 mm), the loose knot is descended through the port to the promontory. Then, the left needle holder grasps and pulls down the knot, and with the aid of the right needle holder, the knot is tied in place at the level of the promontory. Another four intracorporeal knots fix the mesh in place.

�Closure�of�the�Posterior�Peritoneum�

The posterior peritoneum and the peritoneum of the vesicouterine cul-de-sac are closed with a running su-ture of Vicryl 0. If the uterus is left in situ, the perito-neum covering the bladder is initially closed followed by the posterior part. In hysterectomized patients, a single running suture is done.

T I P

The order of the posterior peritoneal suture is the following: (1) right distal edge of perito-neum, (2) right side of the mesh, (3) right side of the peritoneum covering the bladder, (4) left side of the peritoneum covering the bladder, (5) left side of the mesh, and (6) left distal edge of posterior peritoneum.

The first knot is done, and then a running cranially ori-ented suture is performed, taking care to pass the needle at the edge of the peritoneum to avoid transfixing the ureter at the level of the promontory. The goal is to leave the mesh in a subperitoneal position to avoid small-bowel complications (Fig. 26a,b).

The aponeurosis of the 11-mm port is closed with a Polysorb 0 suture, and the skin is closed with running intradermic Monocryl 3-0.

�Postoperative�Considerations

The nasogastric tube is removed at the end of the pro-cedure. The patient is given appropriate analgesia as per protocol (intravenous paracetamol during the first 24 h and major analgesics administered if necessary). The in-travenous perfusion is stopped on day 1 after surgery, and a light diet can generally be resumed on the same day. The bladder catheter is removed on the second postoperative day. An osmotic laxative is prescribed for a few months and normal activity is resumed four weeks after the surgery.

F I g . � 2 6

a�Posterior�peritoneal�closure.�b�Mesh�covered�by�peritoneum

Page 202: Manual of laparoscopic urology

201Laparoscopic Promontory FixationChapter 12

Schematic�mesh�position

Suggested�Readings

Rozet F, Mandron E: Laparoscopic sacral colpopexy ap-proach for genito-urinary prolapse: experience with 363 cases. Eur Urol 2005 Feb; 47(2):230–236.Grynberg M, Dedecker F: Laparoscopic sacral colpopexy: comparison of nonresorbable prosthetic tape (Mersuture) and a SIS collagen matrix (Surgisis ES). Prog Urol 2005 Sep; 15(4):751–755; discussion 755.Antiphon P, Elard S: Laparoscopic promontory sacral col-popexy: is the posterior, recto-vaginal, mesh mandatory? Eur Urol 2004 May; 45(5):655–661.Bruyere F, Rozenberg H: Laparoscopic sacral colpopexy: an attractive approach for prolapse repair. Prog Urol 2001 Dec; 11(6):1320–1326 [Article in French].Paraiso MF, Falcone T: Laparoscopic surgery for enterocele, vaginal apex prolapse and rectocele. Int Urogynecol J Pelvic Floor Dysfunct 1999; 10(4):223–229.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

F I g . � 2 7

Schematic� mesh� position� (By� permis-sion� of� T.� Darnies,� Sofradim� Produc-tion)

Page 203: Manual of laparoscopic urology

�Introduction

Extraperitoneal laparoscopic prostatic adenomectomy is a straightforward surgery indicated for the treatment of symptomatic benign prostatic hyperplasia (BPH) in patients with large-volume glands. The access and initial operative steps are the same as for extraperitoneal lapa-roscopic radical prostatectomy (see Chap. 5). Minimal bleeding and hence reduced transfusion rate, shorter hospitalization, and faster recovery are additional ad-vantages. This minimally invasive technique is a reason-able and effective alternative to open prostatectomy.

�Preoperative�Preparation

Before a patient consents to a laparoscopic prostatic ad-enomectomy, it is important to discuss the specific risks of the surgery, including the potential need to convert to the traditional open operation if difficulties arise.

The patient is admitted to the hospital the day before the surgery for bowel preparation, which includes 2 L of Colopeg® (1 envelope/L) p.o. and a Fleet® enema. Fast-ing starts at midnight before surgery. Thromboprophy-laxis is implemented with good hydration, placement of compressive elastic stockings on the lower extremities, and low-molecular-weight heparin. Enoxaparin (Clex-ane®, Lovenox®) 40 mg sc 1 × day or nadroparin (Flaxi-parine®, Fraxiparin®) 0.6 mL sc 1 × day is initiated on day 1 after the surgery and continued daily until the pa-tient is discharged from the hospital. In selected cases, the treatment is continued for 30 days after the proce-dure. Patients also receive antibiotic prophylaxis with a single preoperative dose of intravenous second-genera-tion cephalosporin, unless they are allergic to penicillin. Blood type and crossmatch are determined.

Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Prostatic Adenomectomy

Chapter 13

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Preoperative Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Patient Positioning and Initial Preparation . . . 204 Trocars and Laparoscopic Instruments . . . . . . . 205 Access and Port Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

�Final�Position�of�Trocars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Surgical Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

�Peritoneum�Displacement�and�Exposure�of�the�Bladder�Neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206�Bladder�Neck�Dissection�and�Division . . . . . . 208�Adenoma�Dissection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209�Prostatic�Fossa�Hemostasis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211�Closure�of�the�Prostatic�Capsule . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Postoperative Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Suggested Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Page 204: Manual of laparoscopic urology

204 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

�Patient�Positioning�and�Initial�Preparation

The surgery is performed under general anesthesia. The base of the table must be positioned below the patient’s hip to avoid elevation of the abdomen while in the Tren-delenburg position (Fig. 1).

The patient is placed in the supine position with the lower limbs in abduction, allowing the laparoscopic cart

F I g . � 3

Shoulder�support

F I g . � 4

Laparoscopic�cart�at�patient’s�feet

F I g . � 1

Patient�position�

F I g . � 2

Position�of�the�legs

Page 205: Manual of laparoscopic urology

205Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Prostatic AdenomectomyChapter 13

to be moved closer to the surgeon and intraoperative ac-cess to the perineum (Fig. 2).

The lower buttocks must be placed at the distal end of the operating table. The upper limbs are positioned alongside the body to avoid the risk of stretch injuries to the brachial plexus and to allow for free movements of the operative team. Shoulder support is properly posi-tioned for the Trendelenburg position (Fig. 3).

A nasogastric catheter is placed by the anesthesiolo-gist and the stomach decompressed to allow additional space during extraperitoneal insufflation. The abdomen, pelvis, and genitalia are skin prepared in case conver-sion to an open procedure is required. An 18Fr Foley catheter with 10 mL in the balloon is introduced after the placement of the sterile drapes.

The surgeon and the second assistant operate from the patient’s left side, and the first assistant is placed at the opposite side of the surgeon. The laparoscopic cart is placed at the patient’s feet, while the instruments table and the coagulation unit are positioned at the left side of the patient (Fig. 4).

�Trocars�and�Laparoscopic�Instruments�

2 × 11 mm (optic 0° and bipolar grasper) 3 × 5 mm (scissors, suction device, and palpator) Monopolar round-tipped scissors, bipolar grasper, dissector, 5-mm suction device, needle drivers (2), and 10-mm laparoscopic optic 0°

•••

F I g . � 5

Access�and�port�placement�(This�figure�was�published�in�Wein:�Campbell-Walsh�Urology,�9th�ed.,�Copyright�Elsevier)

Page 206: Manual of laparoscopic urology

206 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

�Access�and�Port�Placement

The access and port placement is the same as for ex-traperitoneal laparoscopic radical prostatectomy – see Chapter 5, Figure 5.

�Final�Position�of�Trocars

The operating table is moved down and backward, and the patient is placed in a slight Trendelenburg posi-tion. Steps are placed for the surgeon, and the bipolar and monopolar pedals are placed over the step (Fig. 7a,b).

�Surgical�Technique

�Peritoneum�Displacement�and�Exposure�of�the�Bladder�Neck

The peritoneum is cranially mobilized to increase the extraperitoneal space. The fibroareolar and fatty tissue layers between the superolateral aspect of the bladder and the medial aspect of the external iliac vein are bilat-erally released. This maneuver, along with reduction of any visible pelvic wall hernia, allows for further perito-neum displacement.

T I P

Every effort should be made to thoroughly coag-ulate the bleeding vessels during this dissection to avoid image decay throughout the procedure.

The fatty tissue around the prostate is freed, starting lat-erally from the reflection of the endopelvic wall toward the midline on both sides (Fig. 8).

The fibroareolar and fatty tissue attached at the level of the Santorini plexus and over the anterior surface of the prostate are pulled down toward the bladder neck with gentle but firm traction with the bipolar grasper. The superficial branch of the deep dorsal vein complex is coagulated with the bipolar grasper and cut with the cold scissors (Fig. 9).

T I P

The superficial branch is transected at a safe distance from the pubic bone to prevent retrac-tion of the vein and to permit easy vessel control in case of bleeding.

The maneuver of downward traction and pulling of the fatty tissue continues until resistance is encoun-tered, signaling the approach of the bladder neck. The dissected fatty tissue is then lifted and divided in the midline to facilitate the coagulation and transection of the vessels that overlie the bladder neck. The fatty tis-

F I g . � 6

Trocars�in�place

Page 207: Manual of laparoscopic urology

207Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Prostatic AdenomectomyChapter 13

F I g . � 7

a�Steps�under�the�surgeon.�b�Operative�team’s�position

F I g . � 8

Fatty�tissue�around�the�prostate

F I g . � 9�

Coagulation� of� the� superficial� branch� of� the� deep� dorsal�vein�complex�

Page 208: Manual of laparoscopic urology

208 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

sue removal facilitates visualization and dissection of the bladder neck (Fig. 10), which is usually located un-der the crossing of the fibers of the puboprostatic liga-ments (Fig. 11).

�Bladder�Neck�Dissection�and�Division

A transversal incision with the monopolar scissors along with forceful counter pressure with the bipolar grasper, which is placed over the bladder, opens the su-

F I g . � 1 0

Anterior�prostatic�surface�free�of�fatty�tissue

F I g . � 1 2

a�Bladder�neck�opened�with�catheter�inside.�b�Catheter�removed

F I g . � 1 1

The� bladder� neck� is� situated� under� the� crossing� of� the� fi-bers�of�the�puboprostatic�ligaments

Page 209: Manual of laparoscopic urology

209Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Prostatic AdenomectomyChapter 13

F I g . � 1 3

a�Medium�lobe.�b�Plane�of�dissection�–�medium�lobe

F I g . � 1 4

Adenoma�(A)�–�lateral�lobe�enucleation

F I g . � 1 5

Anterior�dissection�of�lateral�lobes

perficial layer and exposes the correct plane of dissec-tion. The anterior aspect of the urethra is exposed and incised. The catheter is removed, and the locations of the ureteral orifices, bladder neck, and adenoma are de-termined (Fig. 12a,b).

�Adenoma�Dissection

A transverse incision is made at the mucosa of the blad-der neck, and the monopolar scissors are used to dissect

Page 210: Manual of laparoscopic urology

210 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

the median lobe (if present) from the overlying prostatic capsule (Fig. 13a,b).

The dissection is deepened posteriorly to the level of the adenoma and extended sideways to permit complete enucleation of the lateral lobes (Fig. 14).

Once a well-defined plane is developed, the grasper instrument lifts the prostatic capsule to further develop the plane. The anterior commissure at the apex is in-

cised, separating the lateral lobes of the prostate anteri-orly (Fig. 15).

The urethral mucosa over the right lateral lobe is in-cised at the level of the apex, and the right lateral lobe is released (Fig. 16).

The left lateral lobe is freed by the same approach, and care should be taken not to injure the muscle fibers of the external urinary sphincter.

F I g . � 1 6

Right�lateral�lobe�is�released

F I g . � 1 7

Adenoma�(A)�is�rolled�to�the�side

F I g . � 1 8

Urethral�mucosa�(U)�incised�and�adenoma�(A)�removed

F I g . � 1 9

Empty�prostatic�fossa

Page 211: Manual of laparoscopic urology

211Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Prostatic AdenomectomyChapter 13

T I P

It is important to grasp the adenoma, rolling it to the sides to facilitate the dissection (Fig. 17).

Posteriorly, the dissection is advanced proximal to the verumontanum; the urethral mucosa is incised, and the adenoma is removed (Fig. 18).

�Prostatic�Fossa�Hemostasis

The prostatic fossa is inspected to confirm that the ad-enoma has been completely removed (Fig. 19).

A full thickness interrupted suture of Vicryl 0 is placed at the lateral sides of the prostatic capsule (at the 9 and 3 o’clock positions) to secure hemostasis (Fig. 20a–c).

The bladder mucosa is then advanced into the pros-tatic fossa and sutured at the 6 o’ clock position with

F I g . � 2 0

a� Right� lateral� capsular� suture.� b� Needle� exiting� inside�prostatic�fossa.�c�Left�lateral�capsular�suture

Page 212: Manual of laparoscopic urology

212 Section III Laparoscopic Surgery for Benign Urological Disorders

Vicryl SH 2-0, followed by bilateral full thickness inter-rupted sutures that complete the trigonization of the prostatic fossa (Fig. 21a,b).

T I P

Pay attention to the ureteral orifices when per-forming these sutures.

�Closure�of�the�Prostatic�Capsule

A 22Fr three-way Foley catheter with a 30-mL balloon is inserted through the anterior urethra and prostatic fossa into the bladder (Fig. 22).

The balloon is initially filled with 10 mL. Starting at the left side, the prostatic capsule is closed with full thickness running sutures of Polysorb 2-0 GL 123 (nee-dle ½ 26 mm) (Fig. 23a,b).

T I P

A long suture thread should be used.

The balloon is now filled with 30 mL and positioned in-side the bladder. Continuous irrigation with saline solu-tion is initiated to avoid blood clot formation.

An EndoCatch® bag is introduced through the left 11-mm port, and the adenoma is placed into the bag. The prostate is removed by enlarging the left iliac spine port site.

F I g . � 2 1

a�Bladder�mucosa�advanced�into�prostatic�fossa.�b�Trigonization�of�prostatic�fossa

F I g . � 2 2

Foley�catheter�inside�bladder

Page 213: Manual of laparoscopic urology

213Extraperitoneal Laparoscopic Prostatic AdenomectomyChapter 13

T I P

To enlarge the incision for the passage of the bag containing the prostate, the skin is cut at its medial end and the fascia at the lateral end to avoid injury to the epigastric vessels.

A Penrose drain is placed close to the prostate capsule and exited through the right iliac spine port site. The aponeurosis of the 11-mm ports is closed with Polysorb 0 UL 877 sutures (needle 5/8), and the skin is closed with a running intradermic Monocryl 3-0. The Penrose is sutured to the skin with Flexidene 2-0, and the skin incisions are covered with Opsite® bandages. The ure-thral catheter is secured to the leg.

�Postoperative�Considerations

The patient is given appropriate analgesia as per proto-col, including intravenous paracetamol during the first 24 h and major analgesics administered as necessary. The intravenous perfusion is stopped on day 1, oral flu-ids are started the morning after surgery, and a light diet can generally be resumed on day 1. The drain is usually

removed after 48–72 h or after secretions are below 50 mL. The irrigation of the bladder is suspended on post-operative day 1 or 2 and the bladder catheter is removed on day 3 if urine is clear. When residual haematuria per-sists, a cystogram is performed. Normal activity is re-sumed four weeks after surgery.

�Suggested�Readings

Baumert H, Ballaro A: Laparoscopic versus open simple prostatectomy: a comparative study. J Urol 2006 May; 175(5):1691–1694.Porpiglia F, Terrone C: Transcapsular adenomectomy (Mil-lin): a comparative study, extraperitoneal laparoscopy ver-sus open surgery. Eur Urol 2006 Jan; 49(1):120–126. Rehman J, Khan SA: Extraperitoneal laparoscopic prosta-tectomy (adenomectomy) for obstructing benign prostatic hyperplasia: transvesical and transcapsular (Millin) tech-niques. J Endourol 2005 May; 19(4):491–496.Van Velthoven R, Peltier A: Laparoscopic extraperitoneal adenomectomy (Millin): pilot study on feasibility. Eur Urol 2004 Jan; 45(1):103–109.

1.

2.

3.

4.

F I g . � 2 3

a�Closure�of�the�prostatic�capsule.�b�Final�result

Page 214: Manual of laparoscopic urology

Aabdomen  3, 22, 50, 64, 92, 116, 140, 166, 181, 205

insufflation  22, 36, 50, 64, 92, 140, 166, 205insufflation pressure  66open access  11pressure  4pressure effects  4tympanic percussion  12

abdominal  3, 4, 8, 12, 22, 50, 64, 92, 140, 166, 205insufflation  22, 36, 50, 64, 92, 140, 166, 205pressure  8space  3volume  8

abdominal wall  5, 11–13, 32, 47, 61, 62, 95, 119, 130, 136, 142, 175, 178, 186, 194closure  33, 47, 62, 178, 186layer  11scar  11vessel  5

acidosis  3respiratory  3

acquired cystic disease  179adenoma  209–212

dissection  209lateral lobe  210median lobe  210

adenomectomy  203, 205, 206, 211–213access  206advantage  203analgesia  213bowel preparation  203haematuria  213hemostasis  211informed consent  203initial preparation  204instruments  205

––––––

––––

––––

–––

–––––––––

needles and sutures used in  212, 213pain control  213positioning  204postoperative control  213preoperative preparation  203surgical technique  206sutures  211, 212trocars used  205

adrenal  60, 61, 174adrenalectomy  32, 61, 174gland  31, 32, 60, 61, 174left adrenal vein  31vein  32, 60, 175

air  66air leakage  66airway  4airway pressure  4ampullae  126anal  135anal canal  135analgesia  7Anderson-Hynes dismembered pyeloplasty; 

see also pyeloplastyanesthesia, laparoscopic surgery  6

air embolism  6hypercapnia  3, 6problems  6recovery period  7

anexectomy  192antibiotic  22, 50, 64, 92, 116, 140, 153, 166, 180, 187, 

203prophylaxis  22, 36, 50, 64, 92, 116, 140, 153, 166, 180, 187, 203

antidiuretic hormone  4antiemetics  7

––––––––

––––

––––

Subject Index

Page 215: Manual of laparoscopic urology

216 Subject Index

aorta  174aneurysm  5

aponeurosis  13, 33, 62, 66, 164, 178, 186, 200, 213closure  13, 66

ascites  63autosomal dominant polycystic kidney disease  179axillary roll  22, 36, 50, 154, 166

BBell muscle  76, 101bipolar grasper  5, 7, 9, 24, 27, 40, 52, 55, 59, 65, 67, 

70, 93, 94, 116, 118, 140, 142, 154, 158, 167, 169, 170, 185, 188–190, 205, 208

bladder  5, 50, 61, 113, 120, 121, 126, 127, 129, 130, 136, 139, 140, 143, 163, 166, 187, 192, 197, 200, 206, 213access for  140anterior dissection  129, 136closure  61cuff  61decompression  22, 36, 50, 166injury  197mobilization  192opening of  197perforation  5retractor  66sutures used in  61, 197

bladder cancer  66, 88, 139, 143high-grade  115, 139muscle-invasive  115pelvic lymphadenectomy  142, 143prognostic variables  139superficial  115

bladder neck  73, 76, 86, 99, 100, 109, 137, 206, 208, 209anastomosis  86, 88, 109, 112dissection  76, 100, 208division  76, 100, 208exposure  73, 99, 206reconstruction  86, 109

blood  4, 5, 12aspiration  12flow  4

body buffers  3Bogros space  67, 70bowel  5, 11, 12, 63, 95, 119, 142, 165, 191, 200

adhesion  11

–––––––––––

–––––

–––––

––

displacement technique  95, 119, 142, 191injury  12, 63obstruction  63puncture  5, 12retraction  191small  200thermal injury  5

brachial plexus injury  22, 50, 64, 92, 116, 140, 154, 166, 181, 188, 205

broad  136, 192ligament  136, 192

bulldog clamp  106

Ccalculi; see autossomal dominant polystic kidney 

diseasecamera  13carbon dioxide  3, 6, 15

absorption  3embolism  6end-tidal concentration  6

carbonic acid  3cardiac output  4cardinal ligament  136catheter  163

nephroureteral  163cephalosporin  22, 50, 64, 92, 116, 140, 153, 166, 180, 

188, 203cervix  136, 137checklist  7, 8

preinsufflation  7circulatory system; see potential clinical outcomes, 

pneumoperitoneumcircumflex iliac vein  123, 145, 148clamp  35, 41, 44, 84

bulldog  84Satinsky vascular  37, 41, 44

Clexane  21, 36, 49, 64, 91, 116, 140, 165, 180, 187, 203clip applier forcep  10clip hemostasis  32, 33, 61, 84, 97, 105, 124, 146, 148, 

176clitoris  136, 137

deep dorsal vein  136suture and needle used, ligation of  137

Cloquet node  97, 123, 145, 148colon  41, 43, 56, 58, 158, 172, 185

en bloc dissection  28, 58, 172

–––––––

–––

––

––

Page 216: Manual of laparoscopic urology

217Subject Index

Colopeg  21, 36, 49, 63, 91, 116, 153, 165, 180, 187, 203

Cooper ligament  96, 123, 145, 148costal arch  13, 25, 38, 53, 155, 169cul-de-sac; see Douglas pouchcystectomy; see radical cystectomycystogram  213cystoprostatectomy; see radical cystectomycystourethrocele  187cytokine level  4

DDenonvillier’s fascia  76, 77, 98, 101, 126, 132

exposure  76, 101Dermalon  134detrusor muscle  61dexamethasone  7Dexon  33, 47, 62, 164, 178, 186diversion

ileal conduit  133ontinent orthotopic  137

dorsal vein  75, 130, 136deep  75, 130, 136superficial branch  75, 130

dorsal vein complex  74, 79, 85, 99, 132, 206division  85, 109ligature  79superficial branch  74, 99, 206suture and needle used in  132

Douglas  97, 125, 126, 135, 191, 195exposure  191incision  97pouch  97, 125, 126, 135, 195

Douglas pouch  66; see also cul-de-sacDouglas semicircular line  66dyschesia  199

Eelectrocautery  7electrosurgical unit  7, 9

settings  7embolism  4

pulmonary  4signs, air embolism  6

emphysema  6subcutaneous  6

endobag  10, 109; see also EndoCatch

––

––

––––

–––

––

EndoCatch  33, 47, 85, 132, 133, 146, 148, 175–177, 212

Endo GIA  10, 165, 167, 170, 176, 177endopelvic  74, 78, 99, 102, 129–131, 136, 206

fascia  74, 78, 99, 102, 129–131, 136wall  74, 206

Enoxaparin; see Clexane, LovenoxEnsure  116epigastric  65, 67, 72, 95, 119, 142, 190

vessel  65, 67, 72, 95, 119, 142, 190epigastric vessel, inferior  5

bleeding control  5gauze bolster  5iatrogenic injury  5suture  5

external oblique muscle  11

Ffallopian tubes  137femoral canal  97, 123, 143, 145, 148femoral vein  4filter, in-line  7Flagyl  116Flaxiparine  21, 36, 50, 64, 91, 116, 140, 165, 180, 187, 

203Flexidene  48, 164, 213Fraxiparin  21, 36, 50, 64, 91, 116, 140, 165, 180, 187, 

203

Ggas  3, 6, 7, 9, 15, 73

egress  15embolus  6evacuation, residual gas  7flow  8inflating  3leakage  9tank  7valve  7

genitofemoral nerve  96, 121, 144, 147genitourinary prolapse  187; see also promontory 

fixationGerota’s fascia  28, 43, 46, 58, 158, 159, 172, 173, 185Gibson insicion  33, 49, 61Gleason  139gonadal  28, 43, 58–60, 120, 144, 147, 159, 173

left gonadal vein  30, 43, 60

––

––––

––––––––

Page 217: Manual of laparoscopic urology

218 Subject Index

right gonadal vein  30, 59vessel  28, 43, 58, 120, 144, 147, 159, 173

grasper  5, 10; see also bipolar grasper

Hhand-assisted bilateral ureterectomy  185; see

also ureterectomyhand-assisted nephrectomy  179, 181, 183–185; 

see also nephrectomy, bilateral, hand-assistedaccess  181advantage  179bowel preparation  179dissection sequence  184first port  181hand introduction technique  183indication  179informed consent  179initial preparation  180instrument  181needles and sutures used  186pain control  186positioning  180postoperative control  186preoperative preparation  179second port  183surgical technique  184third port  184

Hem-o-lok  32, 33, 61, 96, 97, 124, 146, 148, 176Hem-o-lok clip  84, 105hemorrhoidal artery  128, 136heparin, low-molecular-weight  21, 36, 49, 64, 91, 116, 

140, 165, 180, 187, 203hernia  5, 13

diaphragmatic  5incisional  13inguinal  5

hypercapnia; see also anesthesia, laparoscopic  surgerymanagement  6

hypogastric  97, 124, 128, 129, 136, 139, 146, 148anterior branch  128, 136artery  97, 124, 129, 139, 146, 148vein  124, 146, 148vessel  128, 136

hysterectomy  192subtotal  192

––

––––––––––––––––––

–––

––––

Iileal conduit  132, 133ileum  133ileus paralyticus  4iliac  139, 143, 147, 172iliac artery  96, 122, 139, 143, 147, 172

common artery  96, 122, 143, 147, 172external  122, 139internal  139

iliac spine  27, 40, 67, 70, 72, 83, 85, 86, 88, 94, 95, 105, 109, 112, 118, 119, 142, 158, 170, 190, 212, 213

iliac vein  145, 148iliac vessel  29, 43, 58, 120, 146, 147, 172, 174

exposure technique  120ilioinguinal  175, 177, 183, 186

incision  175, 177, 183, 186muscle  33

iliopsoas muscle  121, 144, 147infundibulopelvic ligament  125, 134, 144, 192inguinal ring  67, 130instrument; see also specific instrumentinsufflation  7

pressure  7, 12tubing  7

insufflator  7, 8false reading  9flow rate  8pressure  8settings  7, 8tips  8tubing  7

ischiorectal fossa  135

Kkidney  28, 35, 41, 43, 44, 46, 58, 59, 60, 160, 165, 172, 

174, 176, 177, 179, 184, 185autosomal dominant polycystic disease  179end-stage renal disease  179extraction  177, 186haemostatic technique  35hilum  29, 43, 44, 59hilum dissection  30left kidney  184, 185lower pole  43nephron-sparing surgery  35right kidney  184, 185

–––

––

––

––––––

––––––––––

Page 218: Manual of laparoscopic urology

219Subject Index

tumor  35, 44upper pole  28, 41, 58, 172

Kocher maneuver  185

Llaparoscope  7

image  7white balance  7

laparoscopic  3, 5–9, 11, 13, 15, 16, 21, 22, 24, 28, 33, 35–37, 43, 49, 50, 63–65, 91, 93, 115, 116, 140, 153–155, 165, 166, 179, 181, 187, 188, 203, 205advantage  153, 165, 187, 203approach  49bag  33cart  22, 37, 50, 64, 93, 116, 140, 154, 166, 181, 188, 205conversion  22, 36, 50, 181, 205informed consent  115, 140, 203instrument  9, 10, 24, 65, 93, 116, 140, 154instruments table  11, 22, 37, 50, 154intraperitoneal access  5oncological outcomes  115oncologic efficacy  21pelvic procedure  11sealer/divider  10suturing technique  15, 16tower  7upper tract procedures  13

laparoscopy  3–7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 16, 35, 37, 49, 50, 63, 65, 91, 93, 115, 140, 153, 154, 165, 166, 179, 187, 188, 203, 205absolute contraindications  5access complications  5closed access technique  8complications  5crossing of instruments  13equipment  7insufflation  6intraperitoneal access  5open access (technique)  8pneumoperitoneum deflation  6problems  6relative contraindications  5tumor seeding  6vascular injury  5vessel ligation  10

––

––

––––

––––––––––––

–––––––––––––––

levator ani  126, 195muscle  126muscle exposure  195needle insertion technique  195

lienocolic ligament  58, 172Ligaclip  61, 97, 121, 123, 124, 145, 146, 148LigaSure  115, 116, 119, 128, 129, 136, 181, 185

advantage  115linea alba  66liver  5, 12, 13, 24, 52, 58, 167

bleeding  5puncture  13retractor grasper  24, 27, 37, 40, 52, 55, 154, 167, 172

Lovenox  21, 36, 49, 64, 91, 116, 140, 165, 180, 187, 203

lumbar vein  31, 43, 60lung  3lymphadenectomy  91, 96, 97, 121, 123, 124, 136, 140, 

142–147“split and roll” technique  96, 143, 147access  140bowel preparation  140extended  124, 146first port  142fourth port  142informed consent  140initial preparation  140pelvic  121positioning  140postoperativ control  148preoperative preparation  140second port  142standard  96, 143, 147surgical technique  142third port  142transperitoneal approach  147

lymphaticanatomical drainage  139

lymph node dissection  139modified  139standard  139

lymphocele  97, 123, 145, 148

Mmesenteric artery, inferior  124, 146

–––

–––

–––––––––––––––––

––

Page 219: Manual of laparoscopic urology

220 Subject Index

mesh  187, 189, 195, 197–200anterior mesh, fixation technique  197composition  189cover technique  198erosion  197fixation, needle position  195, 198fixation, suture used  195fixation technique  197needle and suture used  197, 198positioning  200posterior mesh, fixation technique  195tension  199

methylene blue  163Monocryl  34, 48, 62, 88, 112, 178, 186, 200, 213monopolar scissors  7, 9, 24, 26, 39, 52, 54, 72, 93, 95, 

116, 119, 140, 142, 154, 155, 157, 167, 169, 170, 181, 186, 190, 205, 208

Nnadroparin; see Flaxiparine, FraxiparinNavidish  116needle drivers  24, 37, 52, 65, 93, 116, 140, 155, 167, 

181, 189, 205needle holder  9, 15, 195Neomicine  116nephrectomy  21, 22, 33, 35, 37, 43, 165, 166, 169, 170, 

172–174, 176, 177, 179access  37, 167advantage, laparoscopic approach, living donor nephrectomy  165biliteral, hand-assisted  179bowel preparation, living donor nephrectomy  165colon mobilization, living donor nephrectomy  172extracorporeal clamp approach, partial nephrectomy  35fifth port, living donor nephrectomy  172first port, living donor nephrectomy  169fourth port, living donor nephrectomy  170informed consent  35, 165initial preparation, living donor nephrectomy  166instruments, living donor nephrectomy  167ischemia time  46left-side  22, 24, 36, 37, 54, 166, 167liver, living donor nephrectomy  172living donor  165needles and sutures used, living donor nephrectomy  178

–––––––––––

––

––––

–––––––––––

oncologic efficacy  21padding  22, 36, 50, 166pain control, living donor nephrectomy  178pancreas, living donor nephrectomy  172partial  21, 35, 37, 43, 44; see partial nephrectomypolar artery  44positioning  22, 36, 166postoperative control, living donor nephrectomy  178preoperative preparation  35, 165preservation solution, living donor nephrectomy  178radical  21; see also radical nephrectomyright-side  24, 37, 52, 54, 167, 174right renal vein, living donor nephrectomy  177second port,living donor nephrectomy  169surgical technique, living donor nephrectomy  172sutures used, partial nephrectomy  47third port, living donor nephrectomy  170triangulation rule  27, 39, 40, 170trocar, living donor nephrectomy  167tumor resection, partial nephrectomy  44vessel length, living donor nephrectomy  165

nephroureterectomy  49, 50, 52, 54–56, 58, 61access  52, 56bowel preparation  49closure  62colon mobilisation  56fifth port  55first port  53fourth port  55informed consent  49initial preparation  50instruments  52left-side  50, 52, 54–56liver  55needles and sutures used  62pain control  62pancreas  58positioning  50postoperative control  62preoperative preparation  49right-side  52, 54, 55, 58second port  54surgical technique  56technique of distal ureteral dissection  61third port  55

––––––––

––

–––––––––––

–––––––––––––––––––––––

Page 220: Manual of laparoscopic urology

221Subject Index

transperitoneal approach  49triangulation rule  55trocars  52

nerve-sparing; see radical cystectomy, radical prostatectomy

nerve-sparing radical cystoprostatectomy  131neurovascular bundle  78, 80, 102, 104, 131

identification  80, 104preservation  78, 80, 102, 104

nodal  139; see lymph nodenonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs)  34, 

48, 62, 178

Oobturator  97, 123, 124, 128, 139, 145, 148

fossa  97, 128, 139, 145nerve  97, 123, 124, 145, 148

ondansetron  7Opsite  48, 164, 213optic  24, 25, 37, 38, 52–55, 65, 66, 93, 94, 116, 117, 

140, 142, 154, 155, 157, 167, 169, 181, 183–186, 188, 190, 198, 205“true horizon”  198image decay  74, 206insertion technique  66

ovarian vessels  134, 144ovary  134, 137

Ppain  7

anesthetic infiltration  7management  7

palpator  65, 93, 95, 205partial nephrectomy  21, 35, 37, 43; see

also nephrectomy partialbowel preparation  36calyx reconstruction  46closure  47first port  38fourth port  40initial preparation  36lateral margins  44liver  40localization of tumor  44needles and sutures in calyx reconstruction  46pain control  48pancreas  41

–––

––

––

–––

––

––––––––––––

parenchymal reconstruction  46positioning  36postoperative control  48second port  39sixth port  41surgical technique  41third port  40wedge resection  46

pelvic fibrosis  5pelvis  181

pelvic procedures  11penis  78, 79, 99, 103, 104

dorsal venous complex  103Penrose  33, 34, 48, 62, 88, 112, 113, 133, 137, 164, 

178, 186, 213peritoneal  3, 5, 12, 63, 120, 135, 143, 147, 183, 200

cavity  12fold  135incision  120, 143, 147preperitoneal space  12puncture  183

peritoneum  5, 11, 33, 61, 73, 96–99, 120, 125, 129, 130, 136, 175, 177, 195, 196, 206anterior  98closure  195needle and suture used, peritoneum closure  200posterior  97, 125technique of incision  195

pneumoperitoneum  3, 4, 6, 123, 144, 157, 181barotrauma  4carbon dioxide pressure  4central nervous system, potential clinical outcomes  4circulatory system, potential clinical outcomes  4complications  6deep venous thrombosis  4gastrointestinal system, potential clinical outcomes  4immunologic system, potential clinical outcomes  4induction  22, 36, 50oxygen pressure  4physiologic effects  3pressure  4, 123, 144pressure effects  4pulmonary system, potential clinical outcomes  4renal system, potential clinical outcomes  4sympathetic system, potential clinical outcomes  4

––––––––

–––––

–––––

–––

––––

–––––––––

Page 221: Manual of laparoscopic urology

222 Subject Index

upper urinary tract procedures  13pneumothorax  4, 6Polysorb  66, 79, 86, 88, 104, 109, 112, 132, 136, 200, 

212, 213port  13

placement; see specific surgical proceduresprimary  13secondary  13working  13

potency  126, 129preservation  126, 129

presacral  197, 198ligament  197, 198vessel  197

prolapse  187, 197asymmetric  197correction  187genitourinary  187

promontory fixation  190–200access  189advantage  187analgesia  200anterior dissection  196bowel preparation  187exposure technique  197first port  190fixation technique  187fourth port  190initial preparation  188instrument position  188needle insertation technique  195pain control  200positioning  188postoperative control  200preoperative preparation  187second port  190surgical technique  191suture and needle used  195third port  190transperitoneal access  187

prostate  63, 74, 77, 78, 82–84, 91, 99, 102, 103, 105, 106, 127, 129–132, 139, 140, 147, 203, 206, 210–212; see also radical prostatectomyanterior surface  74, 99, 206apex  129apical dissection  132

––––

––

–––

–––––––––––––––––––––

–––

cancer  63, 91, 139, 147capsule closure  212hyperplasia  203planes of dissection  77, 78, 102posterior surface  77, 78, 102

prostate specific antigen  139prostatic  78, 82–84, 103, 105, 106, 132, 203, 210–212

apex  78, 103, 132, 210approach techniques to pedicles  82–84, 105, 106bleeding control  84capsule  210, 211fossa  211, 212pedicle  82, 83, 105, 106

prosthesis  12; see meshPSA  139psoas muscle  43, 58, 70, 96, 145, 159, 173, 174pubis  67puboprostatic ligament  75, 78, 99, 103, 132, 208pubovesical ligament  136pudendal artery, internal  129pyeloplasty  153–155, 158–160, 162, 163

access  155advantage  153Anderson-Hynes technique  158antegrade insertion  162anterior anastomosis  163bowel preparation  153crossing vessels  159dismembered pyeloplasty  153first port  157fourth port  158informed consent  153initial preparation  154instruments  154left-side  154liver  154needle and suture  164pelvic flap  160positioning  154postoperativ control  164preoperative preparation  153reconstruction  160reflux  163right-side  154second port  157surgical technique  158

–––––

––––––

–––––––––––––––––––––––––

Page 222: Manual of laparoscopic urology

223Subject Index

third port  158transmesocolic approach  159triangulation rule  157, 158

Rradical cystectomy  115, 116, 118–120, 123, 124, 126, 

127, 129–132, 134–137, 139analgesia  137apical dissection  132bowel preparation  115female  134first port  117fourth port  119informed consent  115initial preparation  116male  119nerve-sparing technique  131pain control  137parenteral nutrition  137pelvic lymphadenectomy  121positioning  116postoperative control  137preoperative preparation  115second port  118surgical technique  119third port  119trocar used  116

radical nephrectomyaccess  24advantages,  laparoscopic approach  21bowel preparation  21colon mobilization  27fifth port  27first port  25fourth port  27informed consent  21initial preparation  22liver  27needles and sutures used  33pain control  34pancreas  28postoperative control  34preoperative preparation  21second port  26surgical technique  27third port  27

–––

––––––––––––––––––––

––––––––––––––––––

triangulation rule  26radical prostatectomy  8, 63, 65, 66, 70, 72–76, 78–80, 

83–86, 88, 91, 95–101, 103–106, 109, 111, 112access  65, 93, 116advantage  91analgesia  113bowel preparation  63, 91complications  63extraperitoneal approach  63, 65, 66, 70, 72–80, 83–86, 88extraperitoneal endoscopic  63fifth port, extraperitoneal approach  72fifth port, transperitoneal approach  95first port, extraperitoneal approach  65first port, transperitoneal approach  94fourth port, extraperitoneal approach  70fourth port, transperitoneal approach  95haematuria  88, 113informed consent  63, 91initial preparation  64, 92insuflation pressure, extraperitoneal approach  8intraperitoneal bleeding  63needles and sutures used  88, 112pain control  113positioning  64, 92postoperative control  88, 113preoperative preparation  63purse-string suture  66retropubic  63second port, extraperitoneal approach  66second port, transperitoneal approach  94surgical technique  73, 95, 99third port, extraperitoneal approach  67third port, transperitoneal approach  95transperitoneal  63transperitoneal approach  91, 95–101, 103–106, 109, 111, 112

rectal wall  126rectocele  187rectosigmoid  135rectourethral  132rectovaginal  135, 187, 191, 194

dissection  191plane  191, 194posterior dissection  194space  187

––––––

––––––––––––––––––––––––––

––––

Page 223: Manual of laparoscopic urology

224 Subject Index

rectovesicaldissection  125

rectum  126, 127, 187, 195dissection  195lateral wall  195perirectal fatty space  126

rectus fascia  11rectus muscle  13renal  21, 28, 35, 41, 43, 46, 49, 58, 60, 160, 165, 

172, 174, 176, 177, 179; see also potential clinical outcomes, pneumoperitoneumartery  32, 60, 176carcinoma  21, 49early stage, carcinoma  21end-stage disease  179haemostatic techniques  35hilum  32, 60, 172hilum dissection  30, 43, 60, 174incidental tumor  179left renal vein  176length preservation, right renal vein  165locally advanced disease  21nephron-sparing surgery  35pelvis  49, 160perfusion  4right renal artery  174right renal vein  165, 176transitional cell carcinoma  49transplantation  165tumor  35, 44vein  21, 28, 31, 32, 58, 59, 60

renal system  4; see also potential clinical outcomes, pneumoperitoneumblood flow  4glomerular filtration rate  4sodium retention  4urine output  4

renin  4renography; see pyeloplasty

diuretic nuclear  164Retzius space  70, 98, 130, 136

anterior dissection  98round ligament  143, 144, 192

SSantorini’s plexus  74, 79, 99, 100, 130, 206

superficial veins  100

–––

––––––––––––––––––––

––––

scissors  8, 37, 54, 65, 93, 116, 140, 181, 188, 205seminal vesicle  76, 77, 97, 98, 101, 126, 127

dissection  97, 98technique of dissection  76, 77, 101

shunt  5sigmoid  95, 119, 125, 132, 142, 191

fixation  95, 119, 142, 191mesocolon  191

skin incision  15, 33, 62, 178, 186specimen  10, 33, 47, 137, 177

retrieval device  10spermatic vessels  125spleen  5, 28, 41, 58, 172

bleeding  5en bloc dissection  43

splenorenal ligament  58, 172spondylodiscitis  199stapler  10, 165, 167, 170, 176, 177

pusher  177staples  176, 177

row  177stent  162–164

guide wire  162, 163stomach decompression  22, 36, 50, 64, 92, 116, 140, 

166, 181, 188, 205stoma site  116stone formation; see autossomal dominant polycystic 

kidney diseasesuction device  7, 24, 27, 37, 40, 52, 55, 65, 67, 93, 95, 

116, 119, 140, 142, 154, 155, 158, 167, 170, 181, 183, 188–190, 205

surgicel  47bolster  47hemostasis  47

suture  15, 16knot  16loop construction  15

Tthromboprophylaxis  21, 36, 49, 63, 91, 116, 140, 153, 

165, 187, 203Ti-Cron  195, 197, 198transversalis fascia  11Trendelenburg  6, 64, 92, 116, 140, 181, 188, 190, 191, 

204position  6, 64, 92, 116, 140, 181, 188, 190, 191, 204position problems  6

––

––

––

––

––

––

Page 224: Manual of laparoscopic urology

225Subject Index

trigonization  212trocar  5, 6, 8, 11–13, 15, 22, 24, 37, 50, 52, 55, 64–66, 

92, 93, 116, 140, 154, 158, 166, 167, 181, 183, 188, 190, 191, 205, 206blunt tip  13diameter  11, 13, 15fixation  6injury  13introduction  8introduction angle  12introduction technique  13, 15obturator tip  13placement  22, 36, 50, 64, 92, 116, 140, 166, 181, 205positioning  13primary  13secondary  13size  13technique for blockage prevention  190tests of correct introduction  15type  13valve  15

Uumbilical  61, 97, 98, 120, 124, 129, 130, 136, 143, 

146–148artery  97, 98, 120, 124, 129, 130, 136, 143, 146–148ligament  61, 98, 120, 130, 136, 143, 147

urachus  98, 130, 136ureter  28, 29, 43, 56, 58, 61, 97, 120, 121, 132, 133, 

144, 147, 159, 160, 173, 174, 185, 192, 197blood supply  160dissection  56, 61distal ureter  49division  120en bloc resection  49exposure  120frozen-section  121identification  192injury  197intramural  61ligatur  185lower ureter  56oncologic control  49position  197spatulation  160technique of distal dissection  61

–––––––––

––––––––

––

––––––––––––––––

transection  33, 160, 185transitional cell carcinoma  49

ureteral  56, 61, 76, 101, 120, 137, 160, 209orifices  76, 101, 209stent  137wall  160

ureterectomy  185; see hand-assisted bilateral ureterectomybilateral  185

uretero-enteric anastomosis  121ureteropelvic  159ureteropelvic junction obstruction  153urethra  76, 85, 86, 101, 109, 132, 136, 137, 209, 212

anterior wall  101division  85, 109frozen section  137margin biopsy  137suture and needle used in  132urethrectomy  136, 137wall  209

urethral  76, 101, 136, 137, 209, 211meatus  137mucosa  211wall  76, 209

urethrectomy  136, 137suture and needle used  137transvaginal approach  137

urethrovesical junction  137urinary  76, 101, 132, 133

diversion  132, 133perioperative retention  76, 101

urinary sphincter, external  210urine output  4uterine  134, 136, 187, 192

descent  187vessel  136, 192

uterus  5, 134, 137, 192–194fixation  194mobilization  194puncture  5removal  193suture and needle used, uterus fixation  134transection  193

Vvagina  135, 137, 195, 197

dissection  195

––

–––

–––––––

–––

––

––

––

––––––

Page 225: Manual of laparoscopic urology

226 Subject Index

injury  197opening of  197suture and needle used  137wall  137

vaginal wall  135, 197vas deferens  61, 97, 120, 143, 144, 147

dissection technique  97vena cava  21, 30, 32, 124, 146, 174, 175

thrombi(us)  21veress needle  5–7, 9, 11–13, 25, 38, 53, 93, 117, 140, 

155, 169, 181, 189blunt tip  11closed access  11cutaneous incision  13disposable  11hollow cannula  11introduction  11angle  13technique  12

introduction technique  11, 13misplacement  6needle tip  7reusable  11subumbilical incision  11vessel puncture  12

––––

––––––

––––––

verumontanum  211vesical artery  128, 136

inferior  128, 136middle  128superior  128, 136

vesicoperitoneal  192vesicouterine  192, 196, 200

cul-de-sac  200fold  192, 196incision  192incision technique  196

vesicovaginal  191, 196plane  191, 196plane dissection  197

vessel  5, 12injury  5puncture  12

Vicryl  33, 61, 62, 82–84, 86, 105, 109, 160, 178, 186, 195, 197, 200, 211, 212

video  22, 50, 154, 166

WWeston knot  199

–––

––––

––

––